Red 670 2.2

Relion® 670 SERIES
Line differential protection RED670

Version 2.2
Product guide
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN N
Version 2.2
Contents
1. Document revision history.................................................3 16. Monitoring......................................................................... 50

2. Application.............................................................................4 17. Metering..............................................................................53
3. Available functions.............................................................10 18. Human machine interface..............................................54
4. Differential protection......................................................28 19. Basic IED functions.......................................................... 54
5. Impedance protection...................................................... 32 20. Ethernet.............................................................................. 54
6. Wide area measurement system................................... 38 21. Station communication ................................................. 55
7. Current protection.............................................................38 22. Remote communication................................................. 57
8. Voltage protection............................................................. 41 23. Hardware description..................................................... 58
9. Frequency protection....................................................... 42 24. Connection diagrams...................................................... 61
10. Multipurpose protection................................................ 42 25. Certification........................................................................61
11. General calculation...........................................................42 26. Technical data................................................................... 62
12. Secondary system supervision..................................... 42 27. Ordering for customized IED.......................................159
13. Control.................................................................................43 28. Ordering for pre-configured IED................................. 171
14. Scheme communication.................................................45 29. Ordering for Accessories.............................................. 178
15. Logic.................................................................................... 48
Disclaimer
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Hitachi Power Grids. Hitachi
Power Grids assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. Drawings and diagrams are not binding. ABB is a registered
trademark of ABB Asea Brown Boveri Ltd. Manufactured by/for a Hitachi Power Grids company.
© Copyright 2017 Hitachi Power Grids. All rights reserved.
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
2 Hitachi Power Grids
Version 2.2 Issued: September 2020
Revision: N
1. Document revision history GUID-34B323E4-1319-4D42-80CE-29B0F2D36E2C v4
Table 1. Document revision history
Document Date Product revision History

revision
A 2017-07 2.2.0 First release for product version 2.2
B 2017-10 2.2.1 Ethernet ports with RJ45 connector added. enhancements/updates

made to ZMFPDIS and ZMFCPDIS.
C 2018-04 2.2.1 Document enhancements and corrections
D Document not released
E 2018-07 2.2.2 LDCM galvanic X.21 added. Function PTRSTHR added. Ordering section
updated.
F 2018-11 2.2.2 Technical data updated for PSM, EF4PTOC and LxCPDIF . Corrections/
enhancements made to OC4PTOC, TRPTTR, UV2PTUV and OV2PTOV.
Case dimensions updated.
G Document not released
H 2018-12 2.2.3 Functions CHMMHAI, VHMMHAI, DELVSPVC, DELISPVC and DELSPVC,

added. Updates/enhancements made to L4CPDIF, ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS,
CCRBRF, REALCOMP, PTRSTHR and FNKEYMDx. Ordering section
updated.
J 2019-05 2.2.3 PTP enhancements and corrections
K Document not released
L Document not released
M Document not released
N 2020-09 2.2.4 Functions ZMBURPSB, APPTEF, IEC 61850SIM and ALGOS added.
Updates/enhancements made to functions REFPDIF, L4CPDIF, ZMFPDIS,
ZMFCPDIS,PPLPHIZ, PPL2PHIZ, ZCVPSOF, EF4PTOC, ROV2PTOV,SAPTUF,
SAPTOF, CCSSPVC, FUFSPVC, SESRSYN, SMPPTRC, SSIMG, and SSIML.
Ordering section updated. Previous revisions of SOM removed, heavy
duty SOM only alternative. Certification section included.
Hitachi Power Grids 3

© Copyright 2017 Hitachi Power Grids. All rights reserved
Version 2.2
Disturbance recording and fault locator are available to

allow independent post-fault analysis after primary
2. Application M13635-3 v9 disturbances. The Disturbance recorder will also show
The Intelligent Electronic Device (IED) is used for the
remote station currents, as received to this IED, time
protection, control and monitoring of overhead lines
compensated with measure communication time.
and cables in all types of networks. The IED can be used
from distribution up to the highest voltage levels. It is Out of Step function is available to separate power
suitable for the protection of heavily loaded lines and system sections close to electrical centre at occurring
multi-terminal lines where the requirement for tripping out of step.
is one-, two-, and/or three-phase. The IED is also
suitable for protection of cable feeders to generator The IED can be used in applications with IEC/UCA
block transformers. 61850-9-2LE process bus with up to eight merging units
(MU) depending on the other functionality included in
The phase segregated current differential protection the IED. Each MU has eight analog channels, four
provides an excellent sensitivity for high resistive faults currents and four voltages. Conventional and Merging
and gives a secure phase selection. The availability of six Unit channels can be mixed freely in the application.
stabilized current inputs per phase allows use on multi-
breaker arrangements in three terminal applications or Forcing of binary inputs and outputs is a convenient way
up to five terminal applications with single breaker to test wiring in substations as well as testing
arrangements. The communication between the IEDs configuration logic in the IEDs. Basically it means that all
involved in the differential scheme is based on the IEEE binary inputs and outputs on the IED I/O modules (BOM,
C37.94 standard and can be duplicated for important BIM, IOM & SOM) can be forced to arbitrary values.
installations when required for redundancy reasons.
Central Account Management is an authentication
Charging current compensation allows high sensitivity
infrastructure that offers a secure solution for enforcing
also on long overhead lines and cables.
access control to IEDs and other systems within a
A full scheme distance protection is included to provide substation. This incorporates management of user
independent protection in parallel with the differential accounts, roles and certificates and the distribution of
scheme in case of a communication channel failure for such, a procedure completely transparent to the user.
the differential scheme. The distance protection then
Flexible Product Naming allows the customer to use an
provides protection for the entire line including the
IED-vendor independent IEC 61850 model of the IED.
remote end back up capability either in case of a
This customer model will be used as the IEC 61850 data
communications failure or via use of an independent
model, but all other aspects of the IED will remain
communication channel to provide a fully redundant
unchanged (e.g., names on the local HMI and names in
scheme of protection (that is a second main protection
the tools). This offers significant flexibility to adapt the
scheme). There are 8 signals (with 64 kbps) and 192
IED to the customers' system and standard solution.
signals (with 2 Mbps) for intertrip and other binary
signals are available in the communication between the The logic is prepared with a graphical tool. The
IEDs. advanced logic capability allows special applications
such as automatic opening of disconnectors in multi-
A high impedance differential protection can be used to
breaker arrangements, closing of breaker rings, load
protect T-feeders or line reactors.
transfer logics etc. The graphical configuration tool
The auto-reclose for single-, two- and/or three phase ensures simple and fast testing and commissioning.
reclosing includes priority circuits for multi-breaker
A loop testing function allows complete testing
arrangements. It co-operates with the synchronism
including remote end IED when local IED is set in test
check function with high-speed or delayed reclosing.
mode.
High set instantaneous phase and earth overcurrent,
In a differential protection with more than 2 ends one
four step directional or un-directional delayed phase
station can be taken out of service while the other ends
and earth overcurrent, thermal overload and two step
are still protected. During maintenance or power
under- and overvoltage functions are examples of the
network modification, some of the line ends may be
available functions allowing the user to fulfill any
taken out of service while other ends are still running. As
application requirement.
the differential protection scheme is the main
The IED can also be provided with a full control and protection, it must be kept in service to protect the
interlocking functionality including co-operation with remaining part of the line ends that are in service.
the synchronism check function to allow integration of
the main or backup control.
Version 2.2
M11788-3 v11
Communication via optical connections ensures be adapted to special applications and special logic can
immunity against disturbances. be developed, such as logic for automatic opening of
SEMOD51220-5 v15 disconnectors and closing of ring bays, automatic load
Ready to use pre-configured application packages: transfer from one busbar to the other, and so on.
• Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-3 line ends (A42), The basic IED configuration is provided with the signal
see Figure 2.1 matrix, single line diagram and the application
• Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-5 line ends (B33), configuration prepared for the functions included in the
see Figure 2.2 product by default. All parameters should be verified by
• Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-3 line ends (B42), the customer, since these are specific to the system,
see Figure 2.3 object or application. Optional functions and optional
• Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, with distance I/O ordered will not be configured at delivery. It should
protection (C42), see Figure 2.4 be noted that the standard only includes one binary
input and one binary output module and only the key
Optional functions are not configured but a maximum functions such as tripping are connected to the outputs
configuration with all optional functions are available in in the signal matrix tool. The required total I/O must be
the application configuration tool. Analog inputs and calculated and specified at ordering.
binary input/output signals are pre-defined for basic
The configurations are as far as found necessary
use. Other signals may be required by each particular
provided with application comments to explain why the
application.
signals have been connected in the special way. On
The basic delivery includes one binary input module and request, ABB is available to support the re-configuration
one binary output module, which is sufficient for the work, either directly or to do the design checking.
default configured I/O to trip and close circuit breaker.
Add binary I/O boards as required for the application
All IEDs can be reconfigured with the help of the
when ordering.
application configuration tool in PCM600. The IED can

Version 2.2
Description of configuration A42 GUID-A3E1E81D-9278-4AC1-8AAA-AD0D56DABE23 v2
WA1
RED670 A42 – Single breaker with single or three phase tripping

WA2 12AI (6I+6U)
WA2_VT
QB1 QB2
MET UN
WA1_VT VN MMXU
3 Control
Control
Control MET UN
S
SSXCBR
SCBR
SCBR VN MMXU
63 71 94 1→0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC

QA1
S SIMG S SIML SMP PTRC SMB RREC SES RSYN
LINE_CT
Control
Control
Control 52PD PD 50BF 3I>BF 50 3I>> 46 Iub>
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC PDSC CC RBRF PH PIOC BRC PTOC
26 θ>
REM_CT
LC PTTR
REM_VT 87L 3Id/I> 11REL

QB9 L4C PDIF LD RGFC
MET Usqi MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I<

QC9
V MSQI CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC
DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh MET I MET Isqi

DRP RDRE LMB RFLO ETP MMTR C MMXU C MSQI
LINE_VT
27 2(3U<) 27 3U< 59 2(3U>) MET UN MET U

UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV OV2 PTOV VN MMXU V MMXU
Other Functions available from the function library
87 INd/I 7I DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50N IN>> 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>)
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC EF4 PTOC EF PIOC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC
Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

`
Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV
Optional Functions
67NT IO> → TEF ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id>

AP PTEF CHM MHAI CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF
24 U/f> 78 Ucos Zpsl 78 Ucos 51TF 3 Control 3 Control

OEX PVPH OOS PPAM PMU REP PSL PSCH PSP PPAM PTR STHR Q CRSV S CILO
3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> VTHD UTHD 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85

S CSWI SDEPSDE S XSWI VD SPVC VHM MHAI VR PVOC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH
85 85 21 Z< 68 Zpsb
ZCLC PSCH ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH ZCV PSOF ZMF PDIS ZMBU RPSB
IEC16000199-3-en.vsdx
IEC16000199 V3 EN-US
Figure 1. Block diagram for configuration A42

Version 2.2
Description of configuration B33 GUID-1231CFD6-8CEF-464E-8124-E9F7EFD0FF62 v2
WA1
RED670 B33 – Multi breaker with single or three phase tripping

12AI (6I+6U)
QB1 WA1_VT
WA1_CT
Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD MET UN
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC VN MMXU
Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD 3 Control
Control
Control
WA1_QA1
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR
REM_CT
71 63
S SIML S SIMG
WA1_QB6
LINE1_QB9 87L 87L 3Id/I>

11REL
LINE1_VT LDL PSCH LT3C PDIF Σ
LD RGFC

QB61 V MSQI CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC
DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh

DRP RDRE LMB RFLO ETP MMTR
TIE_QA1
MET Isqi MET I 46 Iub> 50 3I>> 26 θ>
3I>STB
C MSQI C MMXU BRC PTOC PH PIOC LC PTTR
TIE_CT
MET U MET UN 27 3U< 27 3U< 59 3U>
LINE2_VT V MMXU VN MMXU UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV OV2 PTOV
MET UN
QB62
WA2_VT VN MMXU
MET UN 94
94 1→0
1→0 79 0→1
79 5(0→1) 25 SC
25 SC/VC
LINE2_QB9
VN MMXU SMP
SMPPTRC
PTRC SMB
SMBRREC
RREC SES
SESRSYN
RSYN

87 INd/I 7I DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50N IN>>
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC EF4 PTOC EF PIOC
WA2_QB6 26 Θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 3 Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f>

LF PTTR NS4 PTOC Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF
81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV
WA2_QA1 Optional Functions
67NT IO> → TEF ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P>

AP PTEF CHM MHAI CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH GOP PDOP
37 P< 87 Id> 87L 3Id/I> 87L 3Id/I> 87L 3Id/I> 24 U/f>

QB2
GUP PDUP HZ PDIF L3C PDIF L6C PDIF LT6C PDIF OEX PVPH
WA2
78 Ucos Zpsl 78 Ucos 51TF 3 Control
OOS PPAM PMU REP PSL PSCH PSP PPAM PTR STHR Q CRSV
3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<)
S CILO S CSWI SDE PSDE S XSWI VD SPVC VR PVOC
VTHD UTHD 85 85 85 85
VHM MHAI ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH ZCLC PSCH ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH
21 Z< 68 Zpsb
ZCV PSOF ZMF PDIS ZMBU RPSB
Figure 2. Block diagram for configuration B33

Version 2.2
Description of configuration B42 GUID-D1058782-6EAD-4E94-8513-1D3647E67250 v2
WA1
RED670 B42 – Multi breaker with single or three phase tripping

12AI (6I+6U)
QB1 WA1_VT
WA1_CT
Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD MET UN
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC VN MMXU
Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD
REM_CT1 SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC 3 Control
Control
Control
WA1_QA1
SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR
REM_CT2
71 63
S SIML S SIMG
REM_VT
WA1_QB6
LINE1_QB9 87L 3Id/I>

11REL
LINE1_VT L4C PDIF Σ
LD RGFC

QB61 V MSQI CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC
DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh

DRP RDRE LMB RFLO ETP MMTR
TIE_QA1
MET Isqi MET I 46 Iub> 50 3I>> 26 θ>
3I>STB
C MSQI C MMXU BRC PTOC PH PIOC LC PTTR
TIE_CT
MET U MET UN 27 3U< 27 3U< 59 3U>
LINE2_VT V MMXU VN MMXU UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV OV2 PTOV
MET UN
QB62 WA2_VT VN MMXU
MET UN 94
94 1→0
1→0 79 0→1
79 5(0→1) 25 SC
25 SC/VC
LINE2_QB9
VN MMXU SMP
SMPPTRC
PTRC SMB
SMBRREC
RREC SES
SESRSYN
RSYN

87 INd/I 7I DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50N IN>>
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC EF4 PTOC EF PIOC
WA2_QB6 26 Θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 3 Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f>

LF PTTR NS4 PTOC Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF
81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV
WA2_QA1
Optional Functions
67NT IO> → TEF ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P>

AP PTEF CHM MHAI CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH GOP PDOP
QB2 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos Zpsl

GUP PDUP HZ PDIF OEX PVPH OOS PPAM PMU REP PSL PSCH
WA2
78 Ucos 51TF 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 67N IN>
PSP PPAM PTR STHR Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI SDE PSDE
3 Control 60 Ud> VTHD UTHD 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85

S XSWI VD SPVC VHM MHAI VR PVOC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH
85 85 21 Z< 68 Zpsb
ZCLC PSCH ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH ZCV PSOF ZMF PDIS ZMBU RPSB
Figure 3. Block diagram for configuration B42

Version 2.2
Description of configuration C42 GUID-C82DE474-FDC4-49CF-AF12-445716D9C6B6 v2
WA1
RED670 C42 – Single breaker with single or three phase tripping and back-up
distance protection 12AI (6I+6U)
WA2
DFR/SER DR 21FL FL
DRP RDRE LMB RFLO
WA2_VT
QB1 QB2
MET UN
WA1_VT VN MMXU
3 Control
Control
Control MET UN
SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR VN MMXU
63 71 94 1→0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC

QA1
S SIMG S SIML SMP PTRC SMB RREC SES RSYN
LINE_CT
Control
Control
Control 52PD PD 50BF 3I>BF 50 3I>> 46 Iub>
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC PDSC CC RBRF PH PIOC BRC PTOC
REM_CT 26 θ>
LC PTTR
REM_VT 87L 3Id/I> 11REL

QB9
L4C PDIF LD RGFC
MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I< 21 Z<

QC9
CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC ZMF PDIS
MET W/Varh MET I MET Isqi

ETP MMTR C MMXU C MSQI
85 85 50N IN>> 51N_67N 4(IN>)

LINE_VT
EC PSCH ECRW PSCH EF PIOC EF4 PTOC
59 2(3U>) 27 2(3U<) 27 3U<

OV2 PTOV UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV
85 85 68 Zpsb
ZCRW PSCH ZC PSCH ZMBU RPSB ZCV PSOF
MET Usqi MET UN MET U

V MSQI VN MMXU V MMXU
87 INd/I 7I DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 78 Ucos Zpsl
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC OOS PPAM PSL PSCH
Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV ZCLC PSCH
Optional Functions
67NT IO> → TEF ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f>
AP PTEF CHM MHAI CV GAPC GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF OEX PVPH PMU REP
78 Ucos 51TF 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud>

PSP PPAM PTR STHR Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI SDEPSDE S XSWI VD SPVC
VTHD UTHD 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85

VHM MHAI VR PVOC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH
Figure 4. Block diagram for configuration C42

Version 2.2
3. Available functions GUID-F5776DD1-BD04-4872-BB89-A0412B4B5CC3 v1
The following tables list all the

functions available in the IED. Those
functions that are not exposed to the
user or do not need to be configured
are not described in this manual.
Main protection functions GUID-66BAAD98-851D-4AAC-B386-B38B57718BD2 v16
Table 2. Example of quantities
2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)
C30 =1/2 CB application. For the pre-configured variants

Version 2.2
IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)
Differential protection
HZPDIF 87 High impedance differential protection, single 0-3 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02
phase
REFPDIF 87N Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance 0–2
L3CPDIF 87L Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line 0-1 1-A34
ends
L6CPDIF 87L Line differential protection for 6 CT sets, 3-5 line 0-1 1-A04
ends
LT3CPDIF 87LT Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line 0-1 1
ends, in-zone transformer
LT6CPDIF 87LT Line differential protection for 6 CT sets, 3-5 line 0-1 1-A06
ends, in-zone transformer
L4CPDIF 87L High speed line differential protection for 4 CT 0-1 1 1 1

sets, 2-3 line ends
LDLPSCH 87L Line differential protection logic 0-1 1
LDRGFC 11REL Additional security logic for differential 1 1 1 1 1

protection
Impedance protection
ZMQPDIS, 21 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral 0-7

ZMQAPDIS characteristic
ZDRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral 0-2
ZMCPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral 0-5

ZMCAPDIS characteristic for series compensated lines
ZDSRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral, including 0-2

series compensation
FDPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with 0-2

fixed angle
ZMHPDIS 21 Full-scheme distance protection, mho 0-5

characteristic
ZMMPDIS, 21 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral 0-5

ZMMAPDIS for earth faults
ZDMRDIR 21D Directional impedance element for mho 0-2

characteristic
ZDARDIR Additional distance protection directional 0-2

function for earth faults
ZSMGAPC Mho impedance supervision logic 0-1
FMPSPDIS 21 Faulty phase identification with load 0-2

enchroachment

Version 2.2

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)
ZMRPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, quad characteristic 0-5

ZMRAPDIS separate Ph-Ph and Ph-E settings
FRPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with 0-2

settable angle
ZMFPDIS 21 High speed distance protection, quad and mho 0-1 1–B35 1–B35 1–B35 1
characteristic
ZMFCPDIS 21 High speed distance protection for series comp. 0-1

lines, quad and mho characteristic
PPLPHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1
PPL2PHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1
ZMBURPSB 68 Power swing detection, blocking and unblocking 0-1 1-B35 1-B35 1-B35 1
PSLPSCH Power swing logic 0-1 1-B35 1-B35 1-B35 1
PSPPPAM 78 Poleslip/out-of-step protection 0-1 1-B22 1-B22 1-B22 1-B24
OOSPPAM 78 Out-of-step protection 0-1 1-B22 1-B22 1-B22 1
ZCVPSOF Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and 0-1 1-B35 1-B35 1-B35 1
current based

Version 2.2
Back-up protection functions GUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v16

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)
Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase overcurrent 0-3 1 1 1 1

protection
OC4PTOC 51_671) Directional phase overcurrent 0-3 1 1 1 1

protection, four steps
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual overcurrent 0-1 1 1 1 1

protection
EF4PTOC 51N Directional residual overcurrent 0-3 1 1 1 1

67N2) protection, four steps
NS4PTOC 46I2 Directional negative phase sequence 0-2 1 1 1 1

overcurrent protection, four steps
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residual 0-1 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16
overcurrent and power protection
LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time 0-2 1 1 1 1

constant, Celsius
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time 0-2 1 1 1 1

constant, Fahrenheit
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-2 2 1 2 1
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0-2 1B 1 1B 1

1-B27 1-B27
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 0-2 2 1 2 1
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0-2 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0-2 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 1 1 1 1 1
VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained overcurrent 0-3 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35
protection
APPTEF 67NT Average power transient earth fault 0-1 1-C54 1-C54 1-C54 1-C54
protection
Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0-2 1 1 1 1
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0-2 1 1 1 1
ROV2PTOV 59N Residual overvoltage protection, two 0-2 1 1 1 1

steps
OEXPVPH 24 Overexcitation protection 0-1 1-D03 1-D03 1-D03 1-D03

Version 2.2

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential protection 0-2 2 2 2 2
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 1 1 1 1 1
PAPGAPC 27 Radial feeder protection 0-1
Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B

3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B

3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change of frequency 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B

protection 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04
Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and voltage protection 0-4 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01
General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6
1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

Version 2.2
Control and monitoring functions GUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v20

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)
Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing 0-2 2 1 2 1

check and synchronizing
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 0-4 2B 1B 2B 1B

2-H05 1-H04 2-H05 1-H04
APC10 3 Control functionality for a 0-1 1-H37 1-H37

single bay, max 10 objects
(1CB), including interlocking
(see Table 4)
APC15 3 Control functionality for a 0-1 1-H38 1-H38

single bay, max 15 objects
(2CB), including interlocking
(see Table 5)
QCBAY Bay control 1 1 1 1 1
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch 1 1 1 1 1

positions
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1 1 1 1 1
SXCBR Circuit breaker 6 6 3 6 3
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for 15 15 15 15 15

function selection and LHMI
presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 30 30 30 30 30
DPGAPC Generic communication 32 32 32 32 32

function for Double Point
indication
SPC8GAPC Single point generic 5 5 5 5 5

control function 8 signals
AUTOBITS Automation bits, command 3 3 3 3 3

function for DNP3.0
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 8 8 8 8 8

signals
I103CMD Function commands for IEC 1 1 1 1 1

60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Function commands 50 50 50 50 50

generic for IEC
60870-5-103

Version 2.2

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)
I103POSCMD IED commands with 50 50 50 50 50

position and select for IEC
60870-5-103
I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with 50 50 50 50 50

position for IEC
60870-5-103
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 1 1 1 1 1

60870-5-103
I103USRCMD Function commands user 4 4 4 4 4

defined for IEC
60870-5-103
Secondary
system
supervision
CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit 0-2 2 1 2 1

supervision
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-3 3 3 3 3
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision 0-2 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03

based on voltage difference
DELVSPVC 7V_78V Voltage delta 4 4 4 4 4

supervision, 2 phase
DELISPVC 71 Current delta 4 4 4 4 4

supervision, 2 phase
DELSPVC 78 Real delta supervision, real 4 4 4 4 4
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 12 12 12 12 12
SMAGAPC General start matrix 12 12 12 12 12

block
STARTCOMB Start combinator 32 32 32 32 32
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5 5 5 5 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5 5 5 5 5
INDCALH Logic for group 5 5 5 5 5

indication
AND, GATE, INV, Basic configurable logic 40-420 40-420 40-420 40-420 40-420
LLD, OR, blocks (see Table 3)
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR

Version 2.2

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)
ANDQT, Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0-1

INDCOMBSPQT, (see Table 6)
INDEXTSPQT,
INVALIDQT,
INVERTERQT, ORQT,
PULSETIMERQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
XORQT
AND, GATE, INV, Extension logic package (see 0-1

LLD, OR, Table 7)
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SLGAPC,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, VSGAPC,
XOR
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1 1 1 1
B16I Boolean to integer 18 18 18 18 18

conversion, 16 bit
BTIGAPC Boolean to integer conversion 16 16 16 16 16

with logical node
representation, 16 bit
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 24 24 24 24 24

conversion
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 16 16 16 16 16

conversion with Logic Node
representation
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with 12 12 12 12 12

limit transgression and
overflow supervision
INTCOMP Comparator for integer 30 30 30 30 30

inputs
REALCOMP Comparator for real 30 30 30 30 30

inputs

Version 2.2

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)
Monitoring
CVMMXN Power system 6 6 6 6 6

measurement
CMMXU Current measurement 10 10 10 10 10
VMMXU Voltage measurement 6 6 6 6 6

phase-phase
CMSQI Current sequence 6 6 6 6 6

measurement
VMSQI Voltage sequence 6 6 6 6 6

measurement
VNMMXU Voltage measurement 6 6 6 6 6

phase-earth
EVENT Event function 20 20 20 20 20
DRPRDRE, A1RADR- Disturbance report 1 1 1 1 1

A4RADR, B1RBDR-
B22RBDR
SPGAPC Generic communication 96 96 96 96 96

function for Single Point
indication
SP16GAPC Generic communication 16 16 16 16 16

function for Single Point
indication 16 inputs
MVGAPC Generic communication 60 60 60 60 60

function for measured values
BINSTATREP Logical signal status 3 3 3 3 3

report
RANGE_XP Measured value expander block 66 66 66 66 66
SSIMG 63 Insulation supervision for gas 21 21 21 21 21

medium
SSIML 71 Insulation supervision for liquid 3 3 3 3 3

medium
SSCBR Circuit breaker condition 0-6 6 3 6 3

monitoring
LMBRFLO Fault locator 1 1 1 1 1
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 1 1 1 1 1

60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined 3 3 3 3 3

signals for IEC
60870-5-103

Version 2.2

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)
I103AR Function status auto- 1 1 1 1 1

recloser for IEC
60870-5-103
I103EF Function status earth-fault for 1 1 1 1 1

IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function status fault 1 1 1 1 1

protection for IEC
60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for IEC 1 1 1 1 1

60870-5-103
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 1 1 1 1 1

60870-5-103
I103USRDEF Status for user defined 20 20 20 20 20

signals for IEC 60870-5-103
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit 30 30 30 30 30

supervision
TEILGAPC Running hour meter 6 6 6 6 6
PTRSTHR 51TF Through fault monitoring 0-2 2-M22 2-M22 2-M22 2-M22
CHMMHAI ITHD Current harmonic 0-3 3-M23 3-M23 3-M23 3-M23

monitoring, 3 phase
VHMMHAI VTHD Voltage harmonic 0-3 3-M23 3-M23 3-M23 3-M23

monitoring, 3 phase
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16 16 16 16 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation 6 6 6 6 6

and demand handling

Version 2.2
Table 3. Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks
Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 280
GATE 40
INV 420
LLD 40
OR 320
PULSETIMER 40
RSMEMORY 40
SRMEMORY 40
TIMERSET 60
XOR 40
Table 4. Number of function instances in APC10
Function name Function description Total number of instances
SCILO Interlocking 10
BB_ES 3
A1A2_BS 2
A1A2_DC 3
ABC_BC 1
BH_CONN 1
BH_LINE_A 1
BH_LINE_B 1
DB_BUS_A 1
DB_BUS_B 1
DB_LINE 1
ABC_LINE 1
AB_TRAFO 1
SCSWI Switch controller 10
SXSWI Circuit switch 9
QCRSV Reservation function block for apparatus 2

control
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 10
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching device via 12

GOOSE
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 12

switching device

Version 2.2
Table 5. Number of function instances in APC15
Function name Function description Total number of instances
SCILO Interlocking 15
BB_ES 3
A1A2_BS 2
A1A2_DC 3
ABC_BC 1
BH_CONN 1
BH_LINE_A 1
BH_LINE_B 1
DB_BUS_A 1
DB_BUS_B 1
DB_LINE 1
ABC_LINE 1
AB_TRAFO 1
SCSWI Switch controller 15
SXSWI Circuit switch 14
QCRSV Reservation function block for apparatus 2

control
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 15
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching device via 20

GOOSE
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 20

switching device
Table 6. Total number of instances for configurable logic blocks Q/T
Configurable logic blocks Q/T Total number of instances
ANDQT 120
INDCOMBSPQT 20
INDEXTSPQT 20
INVALIDQT 22
INVERTERQT 120
ORQT 120
PULSETIMERQT 40
RSMEMORYQT 40
SRMEMORYQT 40
TIMERSETQT 40
XORQT 40

Version 2.2
Table 7. Total number of instances for extended logic package
Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 220
GATE 49
INV 220
LLD 49
OR 220
PULSETIMER 89
RSMEMORY 40
SLGAPC 74
SRMEMORY 130
TIMERSET 113
VSGAPC 120
XOR 89

Version 2.2
Communication GUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v18

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)
Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1
ADE LON communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1 1 1 1 1
PROTOCOL Operation selection between SPA and 1 1 1 1 1

IEC60870-5-103 for SLM
RS485PROT Operation selection for RS485 1 1 1 1 1
RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol 1 1 1 1 1
CHSERRS485 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 communication 1 1 1 1 1

protocol
CH1TCP, CH2TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1 1

CH3TCP, CH4TCP protocol
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 1 1 1 1 1

communication protocol
MSTSER DNP3.0 serial master 1 1 1 1 1
MST1TCP, MST2TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1 1

MST3TCP, MST4TCP protocol
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP and 1 1 1 1 1

EIA-485 communication protocol
IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 61850 1 1 1 1 1
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for 59 59 59 59 59

interlocking
IEC 61850SIM IEC 61850 simulation mode 1 1 1 1 1
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16 16 16 16 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 64 64 64 64 64

double point value
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an 32 32 32 32 32

integer value
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 60 60 60 60 60

measurand value
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single 64 64 64 64 64

point value
ALGOS Supervision of GOOSE subscription 100 100 100 100 100
MULTICMDRCV, Multiple command and transmit 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10
MULTICMDSND

Version 2.2

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial 1 1 1 1 1

communication
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication 1 1 1 1 1

for RS485
AGSAL Generic security application component 1 1 1 1 1
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
LPHD Physical device information 1 1 1 1 1
PCMACCS IED configuration protocol 1 1 1 1 1
SECALARM Component for mapping security events 1 1 1 1 1

on protocols such as DNP3 and IEC103
FSTACCSNA Field service tool access via SPA protocol 1 1 1 1 1

over Ethernet communication
FSTACCS Field service tool access 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus 0-1 1-P30 1-P30 1-P30 1-P30

communication, 8 merging units
ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1 1 1 1 1
ALTRK Service tracking 1 1 1 1 1
PRP IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol 0-1 1-P23 1-P23 1-P23 1-P23
HSR IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless 0-1 1-P24 1-P24 1-P24 1-P24
redundancy
PMUCONF, Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors (see 0-1 1-P32 1-P32 1-P32 1-P32
PMUREPORT, Table 8)
PHASORREPORT1,
ANALOGREPORT1
BINARYREPORT1,
SMAI1 - SMAI12
3PHSUM
PMUSTATUS
AP_1-AP_6 AccessPoint_ABS 1 1 1 1 1
AP_FRONT Access point front 1 1 1 1 1
PTP Precision time protocol 1 1 1 1 1
ROUTE_1-ROUTE_6 Route_ABS 1 1 1 1 1
FRONTSTATUS Access point diagnostic for front 1 1 1 1 1

Ethernet port
SCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for non- 6 6 6 6 6

redundant Ethernet port
RCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for redundant 3 3 3 3 3

Ethernet ports
DHCP DHCP configuration for front access 1 1 1 1 1

point

Version 2.2

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)
QUALEXP IEC 61850 quality expander 96 96 96 96 96
Remote communication
BinSignRec1_1 Binary signal transfer, receive 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6
BinSignRec1_2
BinSignReceive2
BinSignTrans1_1 Binary signal transfer, transmit 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6
BinSignTrans1_2
BinSignTransm2
BSR2M_305 Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit receive 1 1 1 1 1

BSR2M_312
BSR2M_322
BSR2M_306
BSR2M_313
BSR2M_323
BST2M_305 Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit transmit 1 1 1 1 1

BST2M_312
BST2M_322
BST2M_306
BST2M_313
BST2M_323
LDCMTRN Transmission of analog data from LDCM 1 1 1 1 1
LDCMTRN_2M_305 Transmission of analog data from LDCM, 1 1 1 1 1

LDCMTRN_2M_306 2Mbit
LDCMTRN_2M_312
LDCMTRN_2M_313
LDCMTRN_2M_322
LDCMTRN_2M_323
LDCMRecBinStat1 Receive binary status from remote LDCM 6/3 6/3 6/3 6/3 6/3
LDCMRecBinStat3
LDCMRecBinStat2 Receive binary status from LDCM 3 3 3 3 3
LDCM2M_305 Receive binary status from LDCM, 2Mbit 1 1 1 1 1

LDCM2M_312
LDCM2M_322
LDCM2M_306 Receive binary status from remote 1 1 1 1 1

LDCM2M_313 LDCM, 2Mbit
LDCM2M_323
Scheme communication
ZCPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic with delta 0-2 1-B35 1-B35 1-B35 1
based blocking scheme signal transmit
ZC1PPSCH 85 Phase segregated scheme 0-2 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05

communication logic for distance
protection
ZCRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed 0-2 1-B35 1-B35 1-B35 1
logic for distance protection

Version 2.2

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)
ZC1WPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed 0-2 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05
logic for phase segregated
communication
ZCLCPSCH Local acceleration logic 0-1 1-B35 1-B35 1-B35 1
ECPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic for 0-1 1-C34 1-C34 1-C34 1

residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed 0-1 1-C34 1-C34 1-C34 1
logic for residual overcurrent protection
DTT Direct transfer trip 0-1
Table 8. Number of function instances in Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors
Function name Function description Total number of

instances
PMUCONF Configuration parameters for IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) 2011 and IEEE1344 1
protocol
PMUREPORT Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) 1
PHASORREPORT1 Protocol reporting of phasor data via IEEE 1344 and IEC/IEEE 60255-118 1
(C37.118) , phasors 1-8
ANALOGREPORT1 Protocol reporting of analog data via IEEE 1344 and IEC/IEEE 60255-118 1
(C37.118) , analogs 1-8
BINARYREPORT1 Protocol reporting of binary data via IEEE 1344 and IEC/IEEE 60255-118 1
(C37.118) , binary 1-8
SMAI1–SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs 1
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase 6
PMUSTATUS Diagnostics for IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1

Version 2.2
Basic IED functions GUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v14
Table 9. Basic IED functions
IEC 61850 or function Description

name
INTERRSIG
Self supervision with internal event list
SELFSUPEVLST
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
BININPUT, SYNCHCAN, Time synchronization

SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH, SYNCHPPS,
SNTP, TIMEZONE
DSTBEGIN GPS time synchronization module
DSTENABLE Enables or disables the use of daylight saving time
DSTEND GPS time synchronization module
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Active parameter setting group
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
TERMINALID IED identifiers
PRODINF Product information
SYSTEMTIME System time
LONGEN LON communication
RUNTIME IED Runtime component
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping
SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol
BCSCONF Basic communication system
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
PRIMVAL Primary system values
SAFEFILECOPY Safe file copy function

Version 2.2
Table 9. Basic IED functions, continued

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
CAMCONFIG Central account management configuration
CAMSTATUS Central account management status
TOOLINF Tools information
COMSTATUS Protocol diagnostic
Table 10. Local HMI functions
IEC 61850 or function ANSI Description

name
LHMICTRL Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE Local human machine language
SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
FNKEYTY1–FNKEYTY5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600

FNKEYMD1–FNKEYMD5
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module

GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15
function blocks are used to form three-phase, phase-

segregated differential protection.
4. Differential protection
Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance
REFPDIF
High impedance differential protection, single phase M13047-3 v20
Restricted earth-fault protection, low-impedance
HZPDIF M13071-3 v13 function (REFPDIF) can be used on all directly or low-
High impedance differential protection, single phase
impedance earthed windings. The REFPDIF function
(HZPDIF) functions can be used when the involved CT
provides high sensitivity and high speed tripping as it
cores have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing
protects each winding separately and thus does not
characteristics. It utilizes an external CT secondary
need inrush stabilization.
current summation by wiring. Actually all CT secondary
circuits which are involved in the differential scheme are The REFPDIF function is a percentage biased function
connected in parallel. External series resistor, and a with an additional zero sequence current directional
voltage dependent resistor which are both mounted comparison criterion. This gives excellent sensitivity and
externally to the IED, are also required. stability during through faults.
The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED REFPDIF can also protect autotransformers. Five
accessories in the Product Guide. currents are measured at the most complicated
configuration as shown in Figure 5.
HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars,
reactors, motors, auto-transformers, capacitor banks
and so on. One such function block is used for a high-
impedance restricted earth fault protection. Three such

Version 2.2
measured by one and sometimes by two three-phase

CT CT
current transformer (CT) groups. The voltages at all
YNdx
CT CB CB ends are also measured if the exact method is selected
Y d
CB CB for charging current compensation. The protected zone
Autotransformer is determined by the positions of the CTs at all ends of
IED
CT the protected circuit. L4CPDIF protects all electrical
equipment, such as power lines, circuit breakers and
small tap transformers, that are within the protected
The most typical CT CB CB CT zone.
application
The most complicated
application - autotransformer
The information on all locally measured currents is
transmitted via communication channels to remote
IEC05000058-2-en.vsd
IEC05000058-2 V1 EN-US
Figure 5. Examples of applications of the REFPDIF IEDs. Then L4CPDIF compares these currents using a
classical current differential principle supplemented by
an additional advanced internal fault detector. This
results in fast protection with very high dependability
High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets,
(relay operates correctly with faults it was designed for)
2-3 line ends L4CPDIF GUID-57872A74-462D-4513-B75B-A46ADCE03522 v2 and very high security (relay does not operate with
High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3
faults it was not designed for).
line ends (L4CPDIF) is a unit type protection system with
typical operate time less than one cycle. These types of Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets L3CPDIF,
systems are suitable for the protection of complex L6CPDIF
transmission network configurations because they M14917-3 v7
Line differential protection applies the Kirchhoff's law
exhibit good performance during evolving, inter-circuit, and compares the currents entering and leaving the
and cross-country faults. They are also highly immune to protected multi-terminal circuit, consisting of overhead
power swings, mutual coupling and series impedance power lines and cables. Under the condition that there
unbalances. High speed line differential protection are no in-line or tap (shunt) power transformers within
requires 2 Mbit/s communication channel to transfer the zone of protection, it offers a phase segregated
analog signals. fundamental frequency current based differential
protection with high sensitivity and provides phase
The L4CPDIF function applies the Kirchhoff's law, and
selection information for single-pole tripping
compares currents entering and leaving the protected
multi-end circuit consisting of overhead power lines and L3CPDIF is used for conventional two-terminal lines with
cables. Under normal load conditions, the sum of or without a 1½ circuit breaker arrangement in one end,
currents is small or close to zero. The function is phase- as well as three-terminal lines with single breaker
segregated: each phase has its own differential, bias arrangements at all terminals.
and incremental currents.
L4CPDIF measures currents at all ends of a protected

circuit. At each physical end, currents are mostly
Protected zone
IED Communication channel IED
Figure 6. Example of application on a conventional two-terminal line
L6CPDIF is used for conventional two-terminal lines with

1½ circuit breaker arrangements in both ends, as well as
multi-terminal lines with up to five terminals.

Version 2.2
Protected zone
IED Comm. Channel IED
Comm. Channel Comm. Channel

IED
IEC05000040_2_en.vsd
Figure 7. Example of application on a three-terminal line with 1½ breaker arrangements
The current differential algorithm provides high differential protection can be time-delayed for low
sensitivity for internal faults and it has excellent differential currents to achieve coordination with
stability for external faults. Current samples from all CTs downstream overcurrent IEDs. The local protection of
are exchanged between the IEDs in the line ends the small tap power transformer is given the time
(master-master mode) or sent to one IED (master-slave needed to disconnect the faulty transformer.
mode) for evaluation.
A line charging current compensation provides
A restrained dual biased slope evaluation is made where increased sensitivity of line differential protection.
the bias current is the highest phase current in any line
end, giving a secure through-fault stability even with Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-
heavily saturated CTs. In addition to the restrained zone transformers LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF M14932-3 v9
evaluation, an unrestrained (instantaneous) high Two two-winding power transformers or one three-
differential current setting can be used for fast tripping winding power transformer can be included in the line
of internal faults with very high currents. differential protection zone. In such application, the
differential protection is based on the ampere turns
A special feature with this function is that applications balance between the transformer windings. Both two-
with small power transformers (rated current less than and three-winding transformers are correctly
50% of the differential current setting IdMin ) connected represented with vector group compensations made in
as line taps (that is, as shunt power transformers), the algorithm. The function includes 2nd and 5 th
without measurements of currents in the tap, can be harmonic restraint and zero-sequence current
handled. The normal load current is considered to be elimination. The phase-segregated differential
negligible, and special measures must be taken in the protection with single-pole tripping is usually not
event of a short circuit on the LV side of the possible in such applications.
transformer. In this application, the tripping of the
Protected zone
IED Comm. Channel IED
Comm. Channel Comm. Channel
IED
IEC05000042_2_en.vsd
Figure 8. Example of application on a three-terminal line with an in-line power transformer in the protection zone

Version 2.2
setting Operation for the differential function is set to

Analog signal transfer for line differential protection M13647-3 v8 Off.
The line differential protection function can be arranged
as a master-master system or a master-slave system
alternatively. In the former, current samples are For line differential protection we
exchanged between all IEDs, and an evaluation is made recommend that all feeder ends use the
in each IED. This means that a 64 kbits/s or 2 Mbit/s same version of RED670 and the line
communication channel is needed between every IED data communication module LDCM.
included in the same line differential protection zone. In The line differential protection in the
the latter, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to latest version of RED670 is compatible
one master IED where the evaluation is made, and trip with older versions of RED670. Older
signals are sent to the remote ends when needed. In this versions than 670 1.2.3 must be verified
system, a 64 kbits/s or 2 Mbit/s communication channel with ABB.
is only needed between the master and each one of the
slave IEDs. The Master-Slave condition for the
differential function appears automatically when the
Protected zone
IED IED
Comm.
Channels
IED IED IED
IEC0500043_2_en.vsd
Figure 9. Five terminal lines with master-master system
Protected zone
IED
IED
Comm. Channels
IED IED IED
IEC050000 44-2-
en.vsd
Figure 10. Five terminal line with master-slave system
Current samples from IEDs located geographically apart

from each other, must be time coordinated so that the Additional security logic for differential protection
current differential algorithm can be executed correctly, LDRGFC GUID-8F918A08-E50E-4E7B-BDCA-FF0B5534B289 v3
this is done with the echo method. For applications Additional security logic for differential protection
where transmit and receive times can differ, the (LDRGFC) can help the security of the protection
optional built-in GPS receivers can be used. especially when the communication system is in
abnormal status or for example when there is
The communication link is continuously monitored, and unspecified asymmetry in the communication link. It
an automatic switchover to a standby link is possible helps to reduce the probability for mal-operation of the
after a preset time. protection. LDRGFC is more sensitive than the main
Version 2.2
protection logic to always release operation for all faults Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic
detected by the differential function. LDRGFC consists (ZMQPDIS) together with Phase selection with load
of four sub functions: encroachment (FDPSPDIS) has functionality for load
encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect
• Phase-to-phase current variation high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines, as shown in
• Zero sequence current criterion figure 11.
• Low voltage criterion
• Low current criterion
X
Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current
samples as input and it calculates the variation using
Forward
the sampling value based algorithm. Phase-to-phase
operation
current variation function is a major one to fulfill the
objectives of the startup element.
Zero sequence criterion takes the zero sequence current

as input. It increases the security of protection during
the high impedance fault conditions. R
Low voltage criterion takes the phase voltages and

Reverse
phase-to-phase voltages as inputs. It increases the
operation
security of protection when the three-phase fault
occurred on the weak end side.
Low current criterion takes the phase currents as inputs

en05000034.vsd
and it increases the dependability during the switch IEC05000034 V1 EN-US
onto fault case of unloaded line. Figure 11. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with
Phase selection with load encroachment function
The differential function can be allowed to trip as no FDPSPDIS activated
load is fed through the line and protection is not
working correctly.
The independent measurement of impedance for each
Features: fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built-in
phase selection makes the function suitable in
• Startup element is sensitive enough to detect the applications with single-phase autoreclosing.
abnormal status of the protected system
• Startup element does not influence the operation Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents
speed of main protection overreaching of zone 1 at load exporting end at phase-
• Startup element would detect the evolving faults, high to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.
impedance faults and three phase fault on weak side
• It is possible to block the each sub function of startup The distance protection zones can operate
element independently of each other in directional (forward or
• Startup signal has a settable pulse time reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them
suitable, together with different communication
schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines,
5. Impedance protection
multi-terminal lines.
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral
characteristic ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS M13787-3 v15 characteristic for series compensated lines
The line distance protection is an up to five (depending
ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS
on product variant) zone full scheme protection function SEMOD168173-4 v11
The line distance protection is an up to five (depending
with three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and
on product variant) zone full scheme protection with
three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of
three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three
the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone
fault loops for phase-to-earth fault for each of the
in resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use as
independent zones. Individual settings for each zone
back-up protection for transformer connected to
resistive and reactive reach give flexibility for use on
overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.

Version 2.2
Quadrilateral characteristic is available. this matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic

with fixed angle (FDPSPDIS) is designed to accurately
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic select the proper fault loop in the distance function
for series compensated lines (ZMCPDIS) function has dependent on the fault type.
functionality for load encroachment which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily The heavy load transfer that is common in many
loaded lines. transmission networks may make fault resistance
coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FDPSPDIS has a
built-in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives
X the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both
the phase selection and the measuring zones without
Forward interfering with the load.
operation
The extensive output signals from the phase selection
gives also important information about faulty phase(s),
which can be used for fault analysis.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The

R measuring elements continuously measure three phase
currents and the residual current and, compare them
Reverse with the set values.
operation
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic
ZMHPDIS SEMOD175459-4 v12
The numerical mho line distance protection is an up to
en05000034.vsd five (depending on product variant) zone full scheme
protection of short circuit and earth faults.
Figure 12. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with
load encroachment function activated The zones have fully independent measuring and
settings, which gives high flexibility for all types of lines.
The independent measurement of impedance for each The IED can be used up to the highest voltage levels. It is
fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in suitable for the protection of heavily loaded lines and
phase selection makes the function suitable in multi-terminal lines where the requirement for tripping
applications with single phase auto-reclosing. is one-, two- and/or three-pole.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm for the The independent measurement of impedance for each
quadrilateral function prevents overreaching of zone1 at fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable phase
load exporting end at phase to earth-faults on heavily selection makes the function suitable in applications
loaded power lines. with single phase autoreclosing.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent Built-in selectable zone timer logic is also provided in
of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non- the function.
directional mode. This makes them suitable, together
with different communication schemes, for the Adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents
protection of power lines and cables in complex network overreaching at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded
configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal power lines, see Figure 13.
lines.
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with

fixed angle FDPSPDIS M13139-3 v9
The operation of transmission networks today is in
many cases close to the stability limit. Due to
environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and
reinforcement of the power system is reduced, for
example, difficulties to get permission to build new
power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify
the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping
and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in

Version 2.2
jX
X
Forward
Operation area Operation area operation
Operation area R
No operation area No operation area Reverse

operation
Figure 13. Load encroachment influence on the offset mho

characteristic
en05000034.vsd

The distance protection zones can operate, independent Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with
of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non- settable angle function FRPSPDIS activated
directional mode (offset). This makes them suitable,
together with different communication schemes, for the
protection of power lines and cables in complex network The independent measurement of impedance for each
configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in
lines and so on. phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.
The possibility to use the phase-to-earth quadrilateral
impedance characteristic together with the mho The distance protection zones can operate, independent
characteristic increases the possibility to overcome of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-
eventual lack of sensitivity of the mho element due to directional mode. This makes them suitable, together
the shaping of the curve at remote end faults. with different communication schemes, for the
protection of power lines and cables in complex network
The integrated control and monitoring functions offer configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal
effective solutions for operating and monitoring all lines.
types of transmission and sub-transmission lines.
Directional impedance element for Mho
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for characteristic ZDMRDIR SEMOD175532-4 v2
earth faults ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS SEMOD154544-4 v7
The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be
The line distance protection is an up to five (depending optionally supervised by a phase unselective directional
on product variant) zone full scheme protection function function (phase unselective, because it is based on
with three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault for each symmetrical components).
of the independent zones. Individual settings for each
zone resistive and reactive reach give flexibility for use Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC SEMOD153843-5 v3
on overhead lines and cables of different types and The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC)
lengths. includes features for fault inception detection and high
SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for loss
The Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for of potential logic as well as for the pilot channel
earth fault functions have functionality for load blocking scheme.
encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect
high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines , see Figure ZSMGAPC can mainly be decomposed in two different
14. parts:
1. A fault inception detection logic

2. High SIR detection logic

Version 2.2
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment X

FMPSPDIS SEMOD153825-5 v7
The ability to accurately and reliably classify different
Forward
types of fault so that single phase tripping and
operation
autoreclosing can be used plays an important roll in
today's power systems.
The phase selection function is design to accurately

select the proper fault loop(s) in the distance function
dependent on the fault type. R
The heavy load transfer that is common in many

transmission networks may in some cases interfere with Reverse
operation
the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted
operation. Therefore the function has a built in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the
possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of the en05000034.vsd
measuring zones without interfering with the load. IEC05000034 V1 EN-US

The output signals from the phase selection function Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with
produce important information about faulty phase(s), settable angle function FRPSPDIS activated
which can be used for fault analysis as well.
Distance measuring zone, quad characteristic The independent measurement of impedance for each
separate Ph-Ph and Ph-E settings ZMRPDIS, fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built-in
ZMRAPDIS phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single pole tripping and autoreclosing.
GUID-014501E7-EE0D-440F-8DC8-C44B848E49D3 v4
The line distance protection is up to five zone full
scheme protection with three fault loops for phase-to-
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents
phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth
overreaching of zone 1 at load exporting end at phase-
fault for each of the independent zones. Individual
to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.
settings for each zone in resistive and reactive reach
gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for The distance protection zones can operate, independent
transformer connected to overhead lines and cables of of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-
different types and lengths. directional mode. This makes them suitable, together
with different communication schemes, for the
Mho alternative quadrilateral characteristic is available.
protection of power lines and cables in complex network
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal
(ZMRPDIS) together with Phase selection, quadrilateral lines and so on.
characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS) has
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with
functionality for load encroachment, which increases the
settable angle FRPSPDIS
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily GUID-09D0E480-C003-424E-BECD-A82BCB0052CD v1
The operation of transmission networks today is in
loaded lines, as shown in figure 15.
many cases close to the stability limit. Due to
environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and
reinforcement of the power system is reduced for
example, difficulties to get permission to build new
power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify
the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping
and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in
this matter. The phase selection function is designed to
accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance
function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many

transmission networks may make fault resistance
coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, the function has
a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives

Version 2.2
the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS is
the phase selection and the measuring zones without fundamentally the same function as ZMFPDIS but
interfering with the load. provides more flexibility in zone settings to suit more
complex applications, such as series compensated lines.
The extensive output signals from the phase selection In operation for series compensated networks, the
gives also important information about faulty phase(s) parameters of the directional function are altered to
which can be used for fault analysis. handle voltage reversal.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The Each measurement zone is designed with the flexibility
measuring elements continuously measure three phase to operate in either quadrilateral or mho characteristic
currents and the residual current and, compare them mode. This can even be decided separate for the phase-
with the set values. to-ground or phase-to-phase loops. The seven zones can
operate either independent of each other, or their start
High speed distance protection, quadrilateral and
can be linked (per zone) through the phase selector or
mho ZMFPDIS GUID-2E34AB7F-886E-499F-8984-09041A89238D v10 the first starting zone. This can provide fast operate
The high speed distance protection (ZMFPDIS) provides
times for evolving faults.
a sub-cycle, down towards a half-cycle operate time. Its
seven zone full scheme protection with three fault loops The operation of the phase-selection is primarily based
for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for on a current change criteria (i.e. delta quantities),
phase-to-earth faults for each of the independent zones, however there is also a phase selection criterion
which makes the function suitable for applications with operating in parallel which bases its operation on
single-phase autoreclosing. voltage and current phasors exclusively. Additionally the
directional element provides a fast and correct
Each measurement zone is designed with the flexibility directional decision under difficult operating conditions,
to operate in either quadrilateral or mho characteristic including close-in three-phase faults, simultaneous
mode. This can be decided separately for the phase-to- faults and faults with only zero-sequence in-feed.
ground or phase-to-phase loops. Out of the seven zones,
During phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power
one zone has fixed directionality to reverse, one zone
lines there is an adaptive load compensation algorithm
has fixed directionality to forward, and five zone with
that prevents overreaching of the distance zones in the
directionality independently settable to forward/
load exporting end, improving the selectivity of the
reverse/non-directional.
function. This also reduces underreach in the importing
The operation of the phase-selection is primarily based end.
on a current change criteria (i.e. delta quantities),
The ZMFCPDIS function has another directional element
however there is also a phase selection criterion
with phase segregated outputs STTDFwLx and
operating in parallel which bases its operation on
STTDRVLx (where, x = 1-3) based on the transient
voltage and current phasors exclusively. Additionally,
components. It provides directionality with high speed,
the directional element provides a fast and correct
dependability and security, which is also suitable for
directional decision under difficult operating conditions,
extra high voltage and series compensated lines where
including close-in three-phase faults, simultaneous
the fundamental frequency signals are distorted.
faults and faults with only zero-sequence in-feed.
Power swing detection, blocking and unblocking
During phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power
ZMBURPSB
lines there is an adaptive load compensation algorithm GUID-DB043AB6-E571-4DCB-B899-663D13AFDE2E v1
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy
that prevents overreaching of the distance zones in the
loads or trip of big generation plants.
load exporting end, improving the selectivity of the
function. This also reduces underreach in the importing Power swing detection, blocking and unblocking
end. function (ZMBURPSB ) is used to detect power swings
and initiate blocking of all distance protection zones.
High speed distance protection for series comp.
lines, quad and mho characteristic ZMFCPDIS
GUID-C5C1ADD8-50A5-4485-848C-77D2222B56DC v9 Also, fault identification and its classification for
The high speed distance protection (ZMFCPDIS) various types of fault occurrences during the power
provides a sub-cycle, down towards a half-cycle operate swing are available in the ZMBURPSB function. So, six
time. Its seven zone, full scheme protection concept is measuring loops used in each distance protection
entirely suitable in applications with single-phase zone, if blocked during power swing, can be unblocked/
autoreclosing. released for distance measurement depending upon the

Version 2.2
fault type and thereby, reliable fault clearance can be Two current channels I3P1 and I3P2 are available in
achieved for faults during power swing. OOSPPAM function to allow the direct connection of two
groups of three-phase currents; that may be needed for
It is still possible to inhibit the ZMBURPSB function for very powerful generators, with stator windings split into
earth-fault currents during a power swing without two groups per phase, when each group is equipped
activating power swing unblocking functionality. with current transformers. The protection function
performs a simple summation of the currents of the two
Power swing logic PSLPSCH SEMOD131350-4 v5 channels I3P1 and I3P2.
Power Swing Logic (PSLPSCH) provides possibility for
selective tripping of faults on power lines during system Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ
oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when the The optional phase preference logic (PPLPHIZ) is used
SEMOD153619-5 v3
distance protection function should normally be with the ZMQPDIS and FDPSPDIS distance protection.
blocked. The complete logic consists of two different The main purpose of this function is to provide a
parts: selective tripping for cross-country faults in isolated or
high impedance-earthed networks.
• Communication and tripping part: provides selective
tripping on the basis of special distance protection Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ
zones and a scheme communication logic, which are GUID-39785DEB-E5D7-447C-977B-9E940CA8E774 v2
The Phase preference logic function (PPL2PHIZ) is used
not blocked during the system oscillations. with the high speed distance protection, quad and mho
• Blocking part: blocks unwanted operation of characteristic (ZMFPDIS). It is intended to be used in
instantaneous distance protection zone 1 for isolated or high impedance earthed networks where
oscillations, which are initiated by faults and their there is a requirement to operate on only one of the
clearing on the adjacent power lines and other primary faulty lines during a cross-country fault. It can be used
elements. without preference to restrain operation for single earth
faults with a delayed zero-sequence current release.
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM SEMOD143246-17 v7
For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the
Sudden events in an electric power system such as large
leading or lagging phase-earth loop for measurement. It
changes in load, fault occurrence or fault clearance, can
initiates operation on the preferred phase based on the
cause power oscillations referred to as power swings. In
selected phase preference scheme. A number of
a non-recoverable situation, the power swings become
different phase preference schemes are available.
so severe that the synchronism is lost, a condition
referred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of the PPL2PHIZ provides an additional phase selection
pole slip protection (PSPPPAM) is to detect, evaluate, criteria, namely under voltage criteria, suitable for phase
and take the required action for pole slipping selection during cross-country faults. In radial networks,
occurrences in the power system. where there is no fault current in the phase with the
external fault, current or impedance based phase
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM GUID-BF2F7D4C-F579-4EBD-9AFC-7C03296BD5D4 v8
selection methods become ineffective. Hence, only
The out-of-step protection (OOSPPAM ) function in the
voltage can be used for phase selection. The phase
IED can be used for both generator protection and as
selection result will be the same for all bays on a bus
well for line protection applications.
since the voltage is the same, which is an important
The main purpose of the OOSPPAM function is to detect, condition for operating with phase preference.
evaluate, and take the required action during pole
In meshed and stronger networks, it may be difficult to
slipping occurrences in the power system.
find appropriate under-voltage settings for phase
The OOSPPAM function detects pole slip conditions and selection. Therefore an automatic phase selection logic
trips the generator as fast as possible, after the first is made available which works in parallel with a set
pole-slip if the center of oscillation is found to be in under-voltage criterion in order to detect the two faulty
zone 1, which normally includes the generator and its phases even for complex networks. If for any reason the
step-up power transformer. If the center of oscillation is PPL2PHIZ is unable to detect the two faulty phases, then
found to be further out in the power system, in zone 2, after a short time delay all three phase-to-earth loops of
more than one pole-slip is usually allowed before the the distance protection will be released for operation.
generator-transformer unit is disconnected. A The final result might be that both faulty feeders are
parameter setting is available to take into account the disconnected. In other words, protection operation is
circuit breaker opening time. If there are several out-of- prioritized over strict adherence to preference.
step relays in the power system, then the one which
finds the center of oscillation in its zone 1 should
operate first.
Version 2.2
Synchrophasor data can be reported to up to 8 clients

Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and over TCP and/or 6 UDP group clients for multicast or
current based ZCVPSOF M13829-3 v4 unicast transmission of phasor data from the IED. More
Automatic switch onto fault logic (ZCVPSOF) is a information regarding synchrophasor communication
function that gives an instantaneous trip at closing of structure and TCP/UDP configuration is available in
breaker onto a fault. A dead line detection check is Application Manual under section IEC/IEEE 60255-118
provided to activate the function when the line is dead. (C37.118) Phasor Measurement Data Streaming Protocol
Configuration.
6. Wide area measurement system
Multiple PMU functionality can be configured in the IED,
Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors which can stream out same or different data at different
GUID-7539462D-A3D6-492D-9926-E67C5B7C72D9 v1
reporting rates or different performance (service)
Configuration parameters for IEEE 1344 and IEC/ classes.
IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) protocol PMUCONF
GUID-33694C62-A109-4D8F-9063-CEFA5D0E78BC v5
The IED supports the following IEEE synchrophasor
standards: 7. Current protection
• IEEE 1344-1995 (Both measurements and data
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC
communication) The instantaneous three phase overcurrent (PHPIOC)
M12910-3 v15
• IEEE Std IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) (Both function has a low transient overreach and short
measurements and data communication) tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit
• IEEE Std IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) and IEC/IEEE protection function.
60255-118 (C37.118).1a-2014 (Measurements)
• IEEE Std IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) (Data Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps
communication) OC4PTOC M12846-3 v18
Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps
(OC4PTOC) has an inverse or definite time delay for each
PMUCONF contains the PMU configuration parameters
step.
for both IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) and IEEE 1344
protocols. This means all the required settings and All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are
parameters in order to establish and define a number of available together with an optional user defined time
TCP and/or UDP connections with one or more PDC characteristic.
clients (synchrophasor client). This includes port
numbers, TCP/UDP IP addresses, and specific settings The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage
for IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) as well as IEEE 1344 polarized with memory. The function can be set to be
protocols. directional or non-directional independently for each of
the steps.
Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and IEC/IEEE
60255-118 (C37.118) PMUREPORT GUID-8DF29209-252A-4E51-9F4A-B14B669E71AB v5
A second harmonic blocking level can be set for the
The phasor measurement reporting block moves the function and can be used to block each step individually.
phasor calculations into an IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118)
and/or IEEE 1344 synchrophasor frame format. The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection
PMUREPORT block contains parameters for PMU EFPIOC M12701-3 v16
performance class and reporting rate, the IDCODE and The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection
Global PMU ID, format of the data streamed through the (EFPIOC) has a low transient overreach and short
protocol, the type of reported synchrophasors, as well tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous earth-
as settings for reporting analog and digital signals. fault protection, with the reach limited to less than the
typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source
The message generated by the PMUREPORT function impedance. EFPIOC is configured to measure the
block is set in accordance with the IEC/IEEE 60255-118 residual current from the three-phase current inputs and
(C37.118) and/or IEEE 1344 standards. can be configured to measure the current from a
separate current input.
There are settings for Phasor type (positive sequence,
negative sequence or zero sequence in case of 3-phase Directional residual overcurrent protection, four
phasor and L1, L2 or L3 in case of single phase phasor), steps EF4PTOC M13667-3 v20
PMU's Service class (Protection or Measurement), Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps
Phasor representation (polar or rectangular) and the (EF4PTOC) can be used as main protection for phase-to-
data types for phasor data, analog data and frequency earth faults. It can also be used to provide a system
data. back-up, for example, in the case of the primary

Version 2.2
protection being out of service due to communication or directional zero sequence current can be used. Current
voltage transformer circuit failure. reversal and weak-end infeed functionality are available.
EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delay Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power
independent for each step. protection SDEPSDE SEMOD171438-5 v6
In isolated networks or in networks with high impedance
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are earthing, the earth fault current is significantly smaller
available together with an optional user-defined than the short circuit currents. In addition to this, the
characteristic. magnitude of the fault current is almost independent on
the fault location in the network. The protection can be
EF4PTOC can be set to be directional or non-directional
selected to use either the residual current or residual
independently for each step.
power component 3U0·3I0·cos j, for operating quantity
IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be with maintained short circuit capacity. There is also
either zero sequence or negative sequence. available one nondirectional 3I0 step and one 3U0
overvoltage tripping step.
A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for
each step. No specific sensitive current input is needed. Sensitive
directional residual overcurrent and power protection
Directional operation can be combined together with (SDEPSDE) can be set as low 0.25% of IBase.
the corresponding communication logic in permissive or
blocking teleprotection scheme. The current reversal Thermal overload protection, one time constant
and weak-end infeed functionality are available as well. LCPTTR/LFPTTR M12020-4 v14
The increasing utilization of the power system closer to
The residual current can be calculated by summing the the thermal limits has generated a need of a thermal
three-phase currents or taking the input from the overload protection for power lines.
neutral CT.
A thermal overload will often not be detected by other
EF4PTOC also provides very fast and reliable faulty protection functions and the introduction of the thermal
phase identification for phase selective tripping and overload protection can allow the protected circuit to
subsequent reclosing during earth fault. operate closer to the thermal limits.
Four step directional negative phase sequence The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2 t
overcurrent protection NS4PTOC GUID-485E9D36-0032-4559-9204-101539A32F47 v6
characteristic with settable time constant and a thermal
Four step directional negative phase sequence memory. The temperature is displayed in either Celsius
overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or or Fahrenheit, depending on whether the function used
definite time delay independent for each step is Thermal overload protection (LCPTTR) (Celsius) or
separately. (LFPTTR) (Fahrenheit).
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to
available together with an optional user defined take action well before the line is tripped.
characteristic.
Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated
The directional function is voltage polarized. time to reclose after operation are presented.
NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional Breaker failure protection CCRBRF

independently for each of the steps.
M11550-6 v19
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast
backup tripping of the surrounding breakers in case the
NS4PTOC can be used as main protection for
own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF measurement
unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase short circuits, phase-
criterion can be current based, CB position based or an
phase-earth short circuits and single phase earth faults.
adaptive combination of these two conditions.
NS4PTOC can also be used to provide a system backup
A current based check with extremely short reset time is
for example, in the case of the primary protection being
used as check criterion to achieve high security against
out of service due to communication or voltage
inadvertent operation.
transformer circuit failure.
CB position check criteria can be used where the fault
Directional operation can be combined together with
current through the breaker is small.
corresponding communication logic in permissive or
blocking teleprotection scheme. The same logic as for

Version 2.2
CCRBRF provides three different options to select how flow in the power system. There are a number of
t1 and t2 timers are run: applications where such functionality is needed. Some
1. By external start signals which is internally latched of them are:
2. Follow external start signal only
3. Follow external start signal and the selected • detection of reversed active power flow
FunctionMode • detection of high reactive power flow
Each function has two steps with definite time delay.

CCRBRF can be single- or three- phase initiated to allow
its use with single phase tripping applications. For the Broken conductor check BRCPTOC SEMOD171446-5 v2
three-phase application of the CCRBRF the current The main purpose of the function Broken conductor
criteria can be set to operate only if “2 elements check (BRCPTOC) is the detection of broken conductors
operates out of three phases and neutral” for example; on protected power lines and cables (series faults).
two phases or one phase plus the residual current start. Detection can be used to give alarm only or trip the line
This gives a higher security to the backup trip command. breaker.
The CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection
single- or three- phase retrip to its own breaker to avoid VRPVOC GUID-935E1CE8-601F-40E2-8D22-2FF68420FADF v6
unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection

incorrect initiation due to mistakes during testing. (VRPVOC) function can be used as generator backup
protection against short-circuits.
Stub protection STBPTOC
When a power line is taken out of service for
M12902-3 v10
The overcurrent protection feature has a settable
maintenance and the line disconnector is opened in current level that can be used either with definite time
multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers or inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can be
will mostly be outside on the disconnected part. The voltage controlled/restrained.
primary line distance protection will thus not be able to
One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic
operate and must be blocked.
is also available within the function in order to provide
The stub protection (STBPTOC) covers the zone between functionality for overcurrent protection with
the current transformers and the open disconnector. undervoltage seal-in.
The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function is
Average Power Transient Earth Fault Protection
released from a normally open, NO (b) auxiliary contact
APPTEF
on the line disconnector. GUID-A16ED4BC-855F-4561-8512-B4F30775784F v1
The APPTEF (Average Power Transient Earth Fault
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC Protection) function is a transient measuring directional
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence
M13269-3 v15
earth-fault protection. Determination of the earth fault
currents which cause thermal stress on rotating direction is based on the short-term built-up transient
machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero at the beginning of the earth fault. This transient is to a
sequence or negative sequence current functions. large extent independent of the neutral point treatment.
This means that the function can be used without any
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a modification in all types of high-impedance grounded,
situation. If the situation persists the surrounding resonant grounded or isolated power systems.
breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical
load situation. For a resonant grounded system, the correct directional
measurement is ensured regardless of how many
The Pole discordance protection function (CCPDSC) Petersen coils are used throughout the interconnected
operates based on information from auxiliary contacts power network. The function is not sensitive to the
of the circuit breaker for the three phases with actual compensation degree of the coils. It will operate
additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents equally well in an under- or over-compensated system.
when required. Parallel neutral resistor to the Petersen coil are not
needed to correctly determine earth fault direction.
Directional over/underpower protection GOPPDOP/ However, these neutral resistors can still be used if
GUPPDUP SEMOD175421-4 v7 already installed in the network.
The directional over-/under-power protection
(GOPPDOP/GUPPDUP) can be used wherever a high/low The function is suitable to be used in distribution and in
active, reactive or apparent power protection or meshed HV sub-transmission networks using high-
alarming is required. The functions can alternatively be impedance grounding. In meshed systems a directional
used to check the direction of active or reactive power permissive scheme is required in order to ensure
Version 2.2
selective tripping of a faulty line. Alternatively, the

function can be used solely for signaling of the earth- Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH M13319-3 v9
fault location to the SCADA system when the power When the laminated core of a power transformer or
network is allowed to operate for a longer time with an generator is subjected to a magnetic flux density
earth-fault being present. beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-
laminated components that are not designed to carry
flux. This will cause eddy currents to flow. These eddy
8. Voltage protection currents can cause excessive heating and severe
damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively
Two-step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV M13789-3 v13 short time. The function has settable inverse operating
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during
curves and independent alarm stages.
faults or abnormal conditions. The two-step
undervoltage protection function (UV2PTUV) can be Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV SEMOD153862-5 v7
used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It
restoration at power outages or as a long-time delayed compares the voltages from two three phase sets of
back-up to the primary protection. voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step
and one trip step.
UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or
definite time delay. Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV SEMOD171457-5 v8
Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV ) is suitable for use in
It has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to the
networks with an automatic system restoration
system service voltage.
function. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command to
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV the circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during
M13798-3 v17
the set value for a time longer than the set time and the
abnormal conditions such as sudden power loss, tap circuit breaker remains closed.
changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long
The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse
lines.
failure supervision FUFSPVC.
Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) function
Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC
can be used to detect open line ends, normally then GUID-82856D0B-5C5E-499A-9A62-CC511E4F047A v3
The radial feeder protection (PAPGAPC) function is used
combined with a directional reactive over-power
to provide protection of radial feeders having passive
function to supervise the system voltage. When
loads or weak end in-feed sources. It is possible to
triggered, the function will cause an alarm, switch in
achieve fast tripping using communication system with
reactors, or switch out capacitor banks.
remote end or delayed tripping not requiring
OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with communication or upon communication system failure.
inverse or definite time delayed. For fast tripping, scheme communication is required.
Delayed tripping does not require scheme
OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close communication.
to system service voltage.
The PAPGAPC function performs phase selection using
Residual overvoltage protection, two steps measured voltages. Each phase voltage is compared to
ROV2PTOV M13808-3 v12
the opposite phase-phase voltage. A phase is deemed to
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during have a fault if its phase voltage drops below a settable
earth faults. percentage of the opposite phase-phase voltage. The
phase - phase voltages include memory. This memory
Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV) function has a settable time constant.
function calculates the residual voltage from the three-
phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a The voltage-based phase selection is used for both fast
single voltage input transformer fed from an open delta and delayed tripping. To achieve fast tripping, scheme
or neutral point voltage transformer. communication is required. Delayed tripping does not
require scheme communication. It is possible to permit
ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or delayed tripping only upon failure of the
definite time delay. communications channel by blocking the delayed
tripping logic with a communications channel healthy
A reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth
input signal.
faults.
On receipt of the communications signal, phase
selective outputs for fast tripping are set based on the
Version 2.2
phase(s) in which the phase selection function has shedding and remedial action schemes. SAPFRC can
operated. discriminate between a positive or negative change of
frequency. A definite time delay is provided for operate.
For delayed tripping, single pole and three pole delays
are separately and independently settable. Furthermore, SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The
it is possible to enable or disable single pole and three operation is based on positive sequence voltage
pole delayed tripping. For single phase faults, it is measurement and requires two phase-phase or three
possible to include a residual current check in the phase-neutral voltages to be connected.
tripping logic. Three pole tripping is always selected for
phase selection on more than one phase. Three pole
tripping will also occur if the residual current exceeds
10. Multipurpose protection
the set level during fuse failure for a time longer than General current and voltage protection CVGAPC
the three pole trip delay time. The General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC)
M13083-11 v9
can be utilized as a negative sequence current

9. Frequency protection protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as
open phase or unsymmetrical faults.
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of
M13349-3 v13
CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection for
generation in the network. high resistive earth faults, outside the distance
protection reach, for the transmission line. Three
Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF) measures functions are used, which measures the neutral current
frequency with high accuracy, and is used for load and each of the three phase voltages. This will give an
shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine independence from load currents and this phase
startup and so on. Separate definite time delays are selection will be used in conjunction with the detection
provided for operate and restore. of the earth fault from the directional earth fault
protection function.
SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage 11. General calculation

measurement and requires two phase-phase or three
phase-neutral voltages to be connected. Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC GUID-EB0B11C3-FF79-4B8D-A335-649623E832F9 v3
The multi-purpose filter function block (SMAIHPAC) is
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF M14953-3 v12
arranged as a three-phase filter. It has very much the
Overfrequency protection function (SAPTOF) is same user interface (e.g. inputs and outputs) as the
applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of standard pre-processing function block SMAI. However
high fundamental power system frequency is needed. the main difference is that it can be used to extract any
frequency component from the input signal. Thus it can,
Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or for example, be used to build sub-synchronous
shunt faults in the power network. Close to the resonance protection for synchronous generator.
generating plant, generator governor problems can also
cause over frequency.
12. Secondary system supervision
SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is
used mainly for generation shedding and remedial Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC M12444-3 v10
action schemes. It is also used as a frequency stage Open or short circuited current transformer cores can
initiating load restoring. A definite time delay is cause unwanted operation of many protection functions
provided for operate. such as differential, earth-fault current and negative-
sequence current functions.
SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares the
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage residual current from a three phase set of current
measurement and requires two phase-phase or three transformer cores with the neutral point current on a
phase-neutral voltages to be connected. separate input taken from another set of cores on the
current transformer.
Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC M14965-3 v14
The rate-of-change of frequency protection function A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit
(SAPFRC) gives an early indication of a main disturbance and is used as alarm or to block protection functions
in the system. SAPFRC measures frequency with high expected to give inadvertent tripping.
accuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, load
Version 2.2
and islanding in grid networks. Voltage based delta

Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC SEMOD113820-4 v13 supervision (DELVSPVC) is needed at the grid
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function interconnection point.
(FUFSPVC) is to block voltage measuring functions at
failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage Current based delta supervision DELISPVC
GUID-30A00AE0-8D3A-4CE8-9379-8D1A0A6078E3 v2
transformer and the IED in order to avoid inadvertent Delta supervision function is used to quickly detect
operations that otherwise might occur. (sudden) changes in the network. This can, for example,
be used to detect disturbances in the power system
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three network. Current based delta supervision (DELISPVC)
different detection methods, negative sequence and provides selectivity between load change and the fault.
zero sequence based detection and an additional delta
voltage and delta current detection. Present power system has many power electronic
devices or FACTS devices, which injects a large number
The negative sequence detection algorithm is of harmonics into the system. The function has
recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high-
additional features of 2nd harmonic blocking and 3 rd
impedance earthed networks. It is based on the
harmonic start level adaption. The 2nd harmonic blocking
negative-sequence quantities.
secures the operation during the transformer charging,
The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs when high inrush currents are supplied into the system.
used in directly or low impedance earthed networks. It is
Delta supervision of real input DELSPVC
based on the zero sequence measuring quantities. GUID-8FAD2CCF-091F-4CDB-8ABF-1BDC874A8403 v2
Delta supervision functions are used to quickly detect
The selection of different operation modes is possible (sudden) changes in the power system. Real input delta
by a setting parameter in order to take into account the supervision (DELSPVC) function is a general delta
particular earthing of the network. function. It is used to detect the change measured
qualities over a settable time period, such as:
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage • Power
measurements can be added to the fuse failure • Reactive power
supervision function in order to detect a three phase • Temperature
fuse failure, which in practice is more associated with • Frequency
voltage transformer switching during station • Power factor
operations.
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC GUID-6AF2219A-264F-4971-8D03-3B8A9D0CB284 v5

Different protection functions within the protection IED 13. Control
operates on the basis of measured voltage at the relay
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing
point. Some example of protection functions are:
SESRSYN M12480-3 v16
The Synchronizing function allows closing of
• Distance protection function.
asynchronous networks at the correct moment including
• Undervoltage function.
the breaker closing time, which improves the network
• Energisation function and voltage check for the weak
stability.
infeed logic.
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing
These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault
(SESRSYN) function checks that the voltages on both
occurs in the secondary circuits between voltage
sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with
instrument transformers and the IED. These
at least one side dead to ensure that closing can be
unintentional operations can be prevented by fuse
done safely.
failure supervision (VDSPVC).
SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection
VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in
scheme for double bus and 1½ breaker or ring busbar
voltage measurement circuit, based on phase wise
arrangements.
comparison of voltages of main and pilot fused circuits.
VDSPVC blocking output can be configured to block Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be
functions that need to be blocked in case of faults in the checked by the function and can have different settings.
voltage circuit.
For systems, which can run asynchronously, a
Voltage based delta supervision DELVSPVC
GUID-6188C4C1-E1D5-421A-B496-96676287EBB2 v2 synchronizing feature is also provided. The main
Delta supervision function is used to quickly detect purpose of the synchronizing feature is to provide
(sudden) changes in the network. This can, for example, controlled closing of circuit breakers when two
be used to detect faults in the power system networks
Version 2.2
asynchronous systems are in phase and can be evaluated with an additional supervision of the status
connected. The synchronizing feature evaluates voltage value of the control object. The command sequence with
difference, phase angle difference, slip frequency and enhanced security is always terminated by a
frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled CommandTermination service primitive and an
closing of the circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a AddCause telling if the command was successful or if
setting. something went wrong.
Autorecloser SMBRREC M12390-3 v17

Control operation can be performed from the local HMI
The auto recloser (SMBRREC) function provides: with authority control if so defined.
• high-speed and/or delayed auto reclosing
• single and/or three phase auto reclosing Interlocking M13531-3 v4
• support for single or multi-breaker applications. The interlocking function blocks the possibility to
operate primary switching devices, for instance when a
disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material
The auto recloser can be used for delayed busbar damage and/or accidental human injury.
restoration.
Each apparatus control function has interlocking
Up to five reclosing shots can be performed. The first modules included for different switchyard
shot can be single-, two-, and /or three-phase arrangements, where each function handles interlocking
depending on the type of the fault and the selected auto of one bay. The interlocking function is distributed to
reclosing mode. each IED and is not dependent on any central function.
For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs communicate
Several auto reclosing functions can be provided for
via the system-wide interbay bus (IEC 61850-8-1) or by
multi-breaker arrangements. A priority circuit allows one
using hard wired binary inputs/outputs. The
circuit breaker to reclose first and the second will only
interlocking conditions depend on the circuit
close if the fault proved to be transient.
configuration and apparatus position status at any
Each auto reclosing function can be configured to co- given time.
operate with the synchrocheck function.
For easy and safe implementation of the interlocking
Apparatus control APC function, the IED is delivered with standardized and
tested software interlocking modules containing logic
M13444-3 v16
The apparatus control functions are used for control and
supervision of circuit breakers, disconnectors and for the interlocking conditions. The interlocking
earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is conditions can be altered, to meet the customer’s
given after evaluation of conditions from other specific requirements, by adding configurable logic by
functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator means of the graphical configuration tool.
place selection and external or internal blockings.
Switch controller SCSWI M13486-3 v10
Apparatus control features: The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises
• Select-Execute principle to give high reliability all functions to properly select and operate switching
• Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle
• Selection and supervision of operator place and operate on one multi-phase device or up to three
• Command supervision one-phase devices.
• Block/deblock of operation
Circuit breaker SXCBR
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications M13489-3 v6
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the
• Substitution of position and quality indications
actual status of positions and to perform the control
• Overriding of interlocking functions
operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
• Overriding of synchrocheck
apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary
• Operation counter
output boards and to supervise the switching operation
• Suppression of mid position
and position.
Two types of command models can be used: Circuit switch SXSWI M16492-3 v6
• Direct with normal security The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to
• SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security provide the actual status of positions and to perform
the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to
primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or
Normal security means that only the command is earthing switches via binary output boards and to
evaluated and the resulting position is not supervised. supervise the switching operation and position.
Enhanced security means that the command is
Version 2.2
Hardware switches are however sources for

Reservation function QCRSV M13506-3 v5 maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an
The purpose of the reservation (QCRSV) function is extended purchase portfolio. The selector switch
primarily to transfer interlocking information between function eliminates all these problems.
IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a
bay, switchyard part, or complete substation. Selector mini switch VSGAPC SEMOD158756-5 v10
The Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function block is a
Reservation input RESIN M16501-3 v6 multipurpose function used for a variety of applications,
The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the as a general purpose switch.
reservation information from other bays. The number of
instances is the same as the number of involved bays VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu, from a symbol
(up to 60 instances are available). on the single line diagram (SLD) on the local HMI or from
Binary inputs.
Bay control QCBAY M13447-3 v8
The Bay control (QCBAY) function is used together with Generic communication function for Double Point
Local remote and local remote control functions to indication DPGAPC SEMOD55850-5 v7
handle the selection of the operator place per bay. Generic communication function for Double Point
QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be indication (DPGAPC) function block is used to send
distributed to different apparatuses within the bay. double point position indications to other systems,
equipment or functions in the substation through IEC
Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is
XLNPROXY GUID-11F9CA1C-8E20-489B-822B-34DACC59553A v1 especially intended to be used in the interlocking
The proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE station-wide logics.
(XLNPROXY) gives an internal representation of the
position status and control response for a switch Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC SEMOD176462-4 v11
modelled in a breaker IED. This representation is The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC)
identical to that of an SXCBR or SXSWI function. function block is a collection of 8 single point
commands that can be used for direct commands for
GOOSE function block to receive a switching device example reset of LEDs or putting IED in "ChangeLock"
GOOSEXLNRCV GUID-5AC7DE11-CB95-4565-A8AE-FB23D59FD717 v1 state from remote. In this way, simple commands can be
The GOOSE XLN Receive component is used to collect sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation.
information from another device’s XCBR/XSWI logical Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is
node sent over process bus via GOOSE. The GOOSE XLN supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary
Receive component includes 12 different outputs (and inputs and SPGAPC function blocks. The commands can
their respective channel valid bits) with defined names be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.
to ease the 61850 mapping of the GOOSE signals in the
configuration process. Automation bits, command function for DNP3.0
AUTOBITS
Local remote LOCREM/Local remote control SEMOD158591-5 v9
Automation bits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used
LOCREMCTRL M17086-3 v11 within PCM600 to get into the configuration of the
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/ commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The
remote switch are connected via the function blocks AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions
local remote (LOCREM) and local remote control GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC 61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for
(LOCREMCTRL) to the Bay control (QCBAY) function LON).
block. The parameter ControlMode in function block
LOCREM is set to choose if the switch signals are Single command, 16 inputs M12446-6 v6
coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware The IEDs can receive commands either from a
switch connected via binary inputs. substation automation system or from the local HMI.
The command function block has outputs that can be
Logic rotating switch for function selection and used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses
LHMI presentation SLGAPC SEMOD114908-4 v11 or for other user defined functionality.
The logic rotating switch for function selection and
LHMI presentation (SLGAPC) (or the selector switch
function block) is used to get an enhanced selector 14. Scheme communication
switch functionality compared to the one provided by a
hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches
Scheme communication logic with delta based
are used extensively by utilities, in order to have
blocking scheme signal transmit ZCPSCH M13860-3 v11
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line
different functions operating on pre-set values.
faults, scheme communication logic is provided. All
Version 2.2
types of communication schemes for permissive On verification of a weak end infeed condition, the weak
underreaching, permissive overreaching, blocking, delta end infeed logic provides an output for sending the
based blocking, unblocking and intertrip are available. received teleprotection signal back to the remote
sending end and other output(s) for local tripping. For
The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used terminals equipped for single- and two-pole tripping,
for scheme communication signaling when included. outputs for the faulted phase(s) are provided.
Undervoltage detectors are used to detect the faulted
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for
phase(s).
distance protection ZC1PPSCH SEMOD141686-4 v3
Communication between line ends is used to achieve Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase
fault clearance for all faults on a power line. All possible segregated communication ZC1WPSCH
types of communication schemes for example, SEMOD156473-5 v3
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase
permissive underreach, permissive overreach and segregated communication (ZC1WPSCH) function is
blocking schemes are available. To manage problems used to prevent unwanted operations due to current
with simultaneous faults on parallel power lines phase reversal when using permissive overreach protection
segregated communication is needed. This will then schemes in application with parallel lines where the
replace the standard Scheme communication logic for overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel
distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH) on line.
important lines where three communication channels (in
each subsystem) are available for the distance The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the
protection communication. apparent power behind the protection can be too low to
activate the distance protection function. When
The main purpose of the Phase segregated scheme activated, received carrier signal together with local
communication logic for distance protection undervoltage criteria and no reverse zone operation
(ZC1PPSCH) function is to supplement the distance gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also
protection function such that: echoed back to accelerate the sending end.
• fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH
for which the faults are on the part of the line not M13823-3 v7
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when
covered by its underreaching zone. no communication channel is available, local
• correct phase selection can be maintained to support acceleration logic (ZCLCPSCH) can be used. This logic
single-pole tripping for faults occurring anywhere on enables fast fault clearing and re-closing during certain
the entire length of a double circuit line. conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a
communication channel.
To accomplish this, three separate communication
channels, that is, one per phase, each capable of The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser
transmitting a signal in each direction is required. (zone extension) or by the loss-of-load current (loss-of-
load acceleration).
ZC1PPSCH can be completed with the current reversal
and WEI logic for phase segregated communication, Scheme communication logic for residual
when found necessary in Blocking and Permissive overcurrent protection ECPSCH
overreaching schemes. To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the
M13918-4 v11
part of the line not covered by the instantaneous step of

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for
the residual overcurrent protection, the directional
distance protection ZCRWPSCH M13896-3 v15 residual overcurrent protection can be supported with a
The ZCRWPSCH function provides the current reversal
logic that uses communication channels.
and weak end infeed logic functions that supplement
the standard scheme communication logic. It is not In the directional scheme, information of the fault
suitable for standalone use as it requires inputs from current direction must be transmitted to the other line
the distance protection functions and the scheme end. With directional comparison, a short operate time
communications function included within the terminal. of the protection including a channel transmission time,
can be achieved. This short operate time enables rapid
On detection of a current reversal, the current reversal
autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.
logic provides an output to block the sending of the
teleprotection signal to the remote end, and to block The communication logic module for directional residual
the permissive tripping at the local end. This blocking current protection enables blocking as well as
condition is maintained long enough to ensure that no permissive under/overreaching, and unblocking
unwanted operation will occur as a result of the current schemes. The logic can also be supported by additional
reversal.
Version 2.2
logic for weak-end infeed and current reversal, included • Low active power trip with 2 selection modes '1 out of
in Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for 3' and '2 out of 3'
residual overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH) function. • Phase wise calculated values of apparent power,
reactive power, active power and power factor are
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for available as service values
residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH M13928-3 v8 • Insensitive to small variations in voltage and current
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for
residual overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH) is a Compensated over and undervoltage protection
supplement to Scheme communication logic for residual COUVGAPC
GUID-229EB419-0903-46FA-9192-BBB35725C841 v2
overcurrent protection ECPSCH. Compensated over and undervoltage protection
(COUVGAPC) function calculates the remote end voltage
To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the of the transmission line utilizing local measured voltage,
line, the directional earth fault protection function can current and with the help of transmission line
be supported with logic that uses tele-protection parameters, that is, line resistance, reactance,
channels. capacitance and local shunt reactor. For protection of
long transmission line for in zone faults, COUVGAPC can
This is why the IEDs have available additions to the
be incorporated with local criteria within direct transfer
scheme communication logic.
trip logic to ensure tripping of the line only under
abnormal conditions.
M13928-6 v2
If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at
both terminals, overreaching permissive communication
Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC
schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current GUID-413851A9-5EB7-4C48-8F5D-E30E470EFFAF v2
Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC)
reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line
function is a fast way of finding any abnormality in line
when a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of
currents. When there is a fault in the system, the current
security can result in a total loss of interconnection
changes faster than the voltage. SCCVPTOC finds
between the two buses. To avoid this type of
abnormal condition based on phase-to-phase current
disturbance, a fault current reversal logic (transient
variation. The main application is as a local criterion to
blocking logic) can be used.
increase security when transfer trips are used.
M13928-8 v5
Permissive communication schemes for residual
Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC
overcurrent protection can basically operate only when GUID-79AB9B9E-9200-44D7-B4EE-57C9E7BB74A9 v2
In Direct transfer trip (DTT) scheme, the received CR
the protection in the remote IED can detect the fault.
signal gives the trip to the circuit breaker after checking
The detection requires a sufficient minimum residual
certain local criteria functions in order to increase the
fault current, out from this IED. The fault current can be
security of the overall tripping functionality. Carrier
too low due to an opened breaker or high-positive
receive logic (LCCRPTRC) function gives final trip output
and/or zero-sequence source impedance behind this
of the DTT scheme.
IED. To overcome these conditions, weak-end infeed
(WEI) echo logic is used. The weak-end infeed echo is Features:
limited to 200 ms to avoid channel lockup.
• Carrier redundancy to ensure security in DTT scheme
Direct transfer trip DTT • Blocking function output on CR Channel Error
Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC • Phase wise trip outputs
GUID-25A2A94F-09FE-4552-89F8-CF22632A7A0D v2
Low active power and power factor protection Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV
(LAPPGAPC) function measures power flow. It can be GUID-C5CBB6A2-780D-4008-98E3-455A404D32CB v2
Negative sequence components are present in all types
used for protection and monitoring of: of fault condition. Negative sequence voltage and
current get high values during unsymmetrical faults.
• phase wise low active power
• phase wise low power factor Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV
• phase wise reactive power and apparent power as GUID-4CF3EC6A-D286-4808-929B-C9302418E4ED v2
Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal
service values conditions involving earth. They can reach considerably
high values during earth faults.
Following features are available:
Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC
• Definite time stage for low active power protection GUID-C4F99554-88BC-4F11-9EFE-91BCA6ED1261 v2
Negative sequence components are present in all types
• Definite time stage for low power factor protection
of fault condition. They can reach considerably high
• Individual enabling of Low active power and Low
values during abnormal operation.
power factor functions

Version 2.2
Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC

GUID-F0C38DA1-2F39-46DE-AFFE-F919E6CF4A57 v2
Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC M15321-3 v14
conditions involving earth. They have a considerably The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) function is used to
high value during earth faults. route trip signals and other logical output signals to
different output contacts on the IED.
Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC
GUID-AC4FF35E-5D86-421E-82C7-93F600E9F453 v2
Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC) is designed for The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and
overcurrent conditions. these outputs can be connected to physical tripping
outputs according to the specific application needs for
Features: settable pulse or steady output.
• Phase wise start and trip signals Group alarm logic function ALMCALH GUID-16E60E27-F7A8-416D-8648-8174AAC49BB5 v4
• Overcurrent protection The group alarm logic function (ALMCALH) is used to
• Phase wise RMS current is available as service values route several alarm signals to a common indication, LED
• Single definite time stage trip function. and/or contact, in the IED.
Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC Group warning logic function WRNCALH

GUID-F7D9A012-3AD4-4D86-BE97-DF2A99BE5383 v4
GUID-E8EA5CE8-ED7A-4FA3-9DAC-83227D53387F v3
Three phase undercurrent function (LCP3PTUC) is The group warning logic function (WRNCALH) is used to
designed for detecting loss of load conditions. route several warning signals to a common indication,
LED and/or contact, in the IED.
Features:
Group indication logic function INDCALH
• Phase wise start and trip signals
GUID-D8D1A4EE-A87F-46C6-8529-277FC1ADA9B0 v4
The group indication logic function (INDCALH) is used to
• Phase wise RMS current is available as service values route several indication signals to a common indication,
• Single definite time stage trip function LED and/or contact, in the IED.
Basic configurable logic blocks M11396-4 v19

The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagate
15. Logic
the time stamp and quality of signals (have no suffix QT
Tripping logic SMPPTRC M12275-3 v15
at the end of their function name). A number of logic
A function block for protection tripping and general blocks and timers are always available as basic for the
start indication is always provided as a basic function user to adapt the configuration to the specific
for each circuit breaker. It provides a settable pulse application needs. The list below shows a summary of
prolongation time to ensure a trip pulse of sufficient the function blocks and their features.
length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct
co-operation with autoreclosing functions. These logic blocks are also available as part of an
extension logic package.
The trip function block includes a settable latch function
for the trip signal and circuit breaker lockout. • AND function block. The AND function is used to form
general combinatory expressions with boolean
The trip function can collect start and directional signals variables. The AND function block has up to four
from different application functions. The aggregated inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
start and directional signals are mapped to the IEC inverted.
61850 logical node data model.
• GATE function block is used for whether or not a
General start matrix block SMAGAPC GUID-BA516165-96DE-4CD9-979B-29457C7653C0 v3
signal should be able to pass from the input to the
The Start Matrix (SMAGAPC) merges start and output.
directional output signals from different application
functions and creates a common start and directional • INVERTER function block that inverts the input signal
output signal (STDIR) to be connected to the Trip to the output.
function.
• LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay the
The purpose of this functionality is to provide general output signal one execution cycle.
start and directional information for the IEC 61850 trip
• OR function block. The OR function is used to form
logic data model SMPPTRC.
general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The OR function block has up to six inputs
and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

Version 2.2
• PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, inputs signal are copied to the corresponding quality
for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of output.
outputs, settable pulse time.
• INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of
• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset outputs according to a "valid" input. Inputs are copied
or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality invalid
block has two outputs where one is inverted. The bit is set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to
memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, invalid. The time stamp of an output will be set to the
the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had latest time stamp of INPUT and VALID inputs.
before the power interruption. RESET input has
priority. • INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input
signal and propagates the time stamp and the quality
• SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or of the input signal.
reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each
block has two outputs where one is inverted. The • ORQT OR function block that also propagates the time
memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, stamp and the quality of the input signals. Each block
the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.
before the power interruption. The SET input has
• PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be
priority.
used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of
• TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed operation of outputs. The function also propagates
outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a the time stamp and the quality of the input signal.
settable time delay.
• RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can
• XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions reset or set an output from two inputs respectively.
with boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output memory setting controls if the block after a power
signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 interruption should return to the state before the
if they are the same. interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates
the time stamp and the quality of the input signal.
Configurable logic blocks Q/T GUID-0CA6511A-E8BD-416E-9B59-5C6BD98C60B7 v5

• SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set
The configurable logic blocks QT propagate the time or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each
stamp and the quality of the input signals (have suffix block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
QT at the end of their function name). memory setting controls if the block after a power
interruption should return to the state before the
The function blocks assist the user to adapt the IEDs' interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates
configuration to the specific application needs. The list the time stamp and the quality of the input signal.
below shows a summary of the function blocks and their
features. • TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out
delayed outputs related to the input signal. The timer
• ANDQT AND function block. The function also has a settable time delay. The function also
propagates the time stamp and the quality of input propagates the time stamp and the quality of the
signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs input signal.
where one is inverted.
• XORQT XOR function block. The function also
• INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group propagates the time stamp and the quality of the
signal. Single position input is copied to value part of input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is
SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied to time part of inverted.
SP_OUT output. Quality input bits are copied to the
corresponding quality part of SP_OUT output.
Extension logic package GUID-144BAAA3-A5EF-49AF-8876-93CC5F3D0234 v1
• INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group The logic extension block package includes additional
signal input. The value part of single position input is trip matrix logic and configurable logic blocks.
copied to SI_OUT output. The time part of single
position input is copied to TIME output. The quality Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN M15322-3 v15
bits in the common part and the indication part of The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) has nine pre-set
(fixed) signals that can be used in the configuration of
an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other
function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating
Version 2.2
certain logic. Boolean, integer, floating point, string be used for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and
types of signals are available. other logics.
One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.

16. Monitoring
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and
overflow supervision TEIGAPC Measurements CVMMXN, CMMXU, VNMMXU,
VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI
GUID-2D64874A-F266-4251-8EED-E813F40513D7 v3
The Elapsed time integrator function (TEIGAPC) is a M12024-3 v9
function that accumulates the elapsed time when a The measurement functions are used to get on-line
given binary signal has been high. information from the IED. These service values make it
possible to display on-line information on the local HMI
The main features of TEIGAPC and on the substation automation system about:
• Applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9 • measured voltages, currents, frequency, active,
seconds). reactive and apparent power and power factor
• Supervision of limit transgression conditions and • measured analog values from merging units
overflow. • primary phasors
• Possibility to define a warning or alarm with the • positive, negative and zero sequence currents and
resolution of 10 milliseconds. voltages
• Retaining of the integration value. • mA, input currents
• Possibilities for blocking and reset. • pulse counters
• Reporting of the integrated time.
Supervision of mA input signals M16054-3 v2

Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit B16I SEMOD175725-4 v5
The main purpose of the function is to measure and
Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit (B16I) is used to process signals from different measuring transducers.
transform a set of 16 boolean (logical) signals into an Many devices used in process control represent various
integer. parameters such as frequency, temperature and DC
battery voltage as low current values, usually in the
Boolean to integer conversion with logical node range 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.
representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC SEMOD175781-4 v8
Boolean to integer conversion with logical node Alarm limits can be set and used as triggers, e.g. to
representation, 16 bit (BTIGAPC) is used to transform a generate trip or alarm signals.
set of 16 boolean (logical) signals into an integer. The
block input will freeze the output at the last value. The function requires that the IED is equipped with the
mA input module.
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16
Disturbance report DRPRDRE
SEMOD158373-5 v7
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used M12153-3 v14
to transform an integer into a set of 16 boolean (logical) Complete and reliable information about disturbances in
signals. the primary and/or in the secondary system together
with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node disturbance report functionality.
representation ITBGAPC SEMOD158421-5 v9
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node Disturbance report (DRPRDRE), always included in the
representation function (ITBGAPC) is used to transform IED, acquires sampled data of all selected analog input
an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and and binary signals connected to the function block with
received by the function to 16 boolean (logic) output a maximum of 40 analog and 352 binary signals.
signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name
Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP for several functions:
GUID-A93564FA-0017-4939-A9C1-095DA0FD9832 v1
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of
• Event list
integer values in the system relative to each other or to
• Indications
a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be
• Event recorder
used for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other
• Trip value recorder
logics.
• Disturbance recorder
Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP • Fault locator
GUID-E17A88D7-D095-4F36-9CD5-64EBFD2A1DEA v1
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of • Settings information
real value signals in the system relative to each other or
to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can
Version 2.2
The Disturbance report function is characterized by The event recorder information is available for the
great flexibility regarding configuration, starting disturbances locally in the IED.
conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.
The event recording information is an integrated part of
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the disturbance record (Comtrade file).
the AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks, which are set to
trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected signals Trip value recorder DRPRDRE M12128-3 v7
from start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time Information about the pre-fault and fault values for
will be included in the recording. Disturbance record will currents and voltages are vital for the disturbance
have visible settings from all function instances that are evaluation.
configured in the application configuration tool.
The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in selected analog input signals connected to the
the standard Comtrade format as a reader file HDR, a Disturbance recorder function. The result is magnitude
configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The same and phase angle before and during the fault for each
applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a analog input signal.
ring-buffer. The local HMI is used to get information
The trip value recorder information is available for the
about the recordings. The disturbance report files can
disturbances locally in the IED.
be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the
disturbance handling tool. The trip value recorder information is an integrated part
of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).
Event list DRPRDRE M12412-6 v9
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE
system from an overview perspective and is a
M12156-3 v13
The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast,
complement to specific disturbance recorder functions. complete and reliable information about disturbances in
the power system. It facilitates understanding system
The event list logs all binary input signals connected to
behavior and related primary and secondary equipment
the Disturbance recorder function. The list may contain
during and after a disturbance. Recorded information is
up to 5000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.
used for different purposes in the short perspective (for
Indications DRPRDRE example corrective actions) and long perspective (for
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about
M12030-3 v7
example functional analysis).
disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary
The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from
system it is important to know, for example binary
selected analog and binary signals connected to the
signals that have changed status during a disturbance.
Disturbance recorder function (maximum 40 analog and
This information is used in the short perspective to get
352 binary signals). The binary signals available are the
information via the local HMI in a straightforward way.
same as for the event recorder function.
There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and
The function is characterized by great flexibility and is
red), which will display status information about the IED
not dependent on the operation of protection functions.
and the Disturbance recorder function (triggered).
It can record disturbances not detected by protection
The Indication list function shows all selected binary functions. Up to ten seconds of data before the trigger
input signals connected to the Disturbance recorder instant can be saved in the disturbance file.
function that have changed status during a disturbance.
The disturbance recorder information for up to 200
Event recorder DRPRDRE disturbances are saved in the IED and the local HMI is
Quick, complete and reliable information about
M12033-3 v8
used to view the list of recordings .
disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary
Event function
system is vital, for example, time-tagged events logged M12805-6 v11
When using a Substation Automation system with LON
during disturbances. This information is used for
or SPA communication, time-tagged events can be sent
different purposes in the short term (for example
at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level.
corrective actions) and in the long term (for example
These events are created from any available signal in the
functional analysis).
IED that is connected to the Event function (EVENT). The
The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals EVENT function block is used for LON and SPA
connected to the Disturbance recorder function. Each communication.
recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.

Version 2.2
Analog, integer and double indication values are also

transferred through the EVENT function. Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR
GUID-E1FD74C3-B9B6-4E11-AA1B-7E7F822FB4DD v14
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function
Generic communication function for Single Point (SSCBR) is used to monitor different parameters of the
indication SPGAPC SEMOD55713-5 v8
breaker condition. The breaker requires maintenance
Generic communication function for Single Point when the number of operations reaches a predefined
indication (SPGAPC) is used to send one single logical value. For a proper functioning of the circuit breaker, it
signal to other systems or equipment in the substation. is essential to monitor the circuit breaker operation,
spring charge indication or breaker wear, travel time,
Generic communication function for measured number of operation cycles and estimate the
values MVGAPC SEMOD55872-5 v10
accumulated energy during arcing periods. Each SCCBR
Generic communication function for measured values function instance is made to be used with a 1-pole, 1-
(MVGAPC) function is used to send the instantaneous phase breaker.
value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment
in the substation. It can also be used inside the same
IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to Fault locator LMBRFLO M13970-3 v13
permit measurement supervision on that value. The accurate fault locator is an essential component to
minimize the outages after a persistent fault and/or to
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP pin-point a weak spot on the line.
SEMOD52450-4 v8
The current and voltage measurements functions
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU), current and The fault locator is an impedance measuring function
voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and giving the distance to the fault in km, miles or % of line
VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O length. The main advantage is the high accuracy
functions (MVGAPC) are provided with measurement achieved by compensating for load current and for the
supervision functionality. All measured values can be mutual zero-sequence effect on double circuit lines.
supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low
The compensation includes setting of the remote and
limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value
local sources and calculation of the distribution of fault
expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced to
currents from each side. This distribution of fault
enable translating the integer output signal from the
current, together with recorded load (pre-fault)
measuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-low
currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault position.
limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or above
The fault can be recalculated with new source data at
high-high limit. The output signals can be used as
the actual fault to further increase the accuracy.
conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming
purpose. Especially on heavily loaded long lines, where the source
voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart, the
Insulation supervision for gas medium function accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced
SSIMG GUID-0692CD0D-F33E-4370-AC91-B216CAAAFC28 v7 compensation included in fault locator.
Insulation supervision for gas medium (SSIMG) is used
for monitoring the circuit breaker condition. Binary Event counter with limit supervison L4UFCNT
GUID-13157EAB-1686-4D2E-85DF-EC89768F3572 v6
information based on the gas pressure in the circuit The Limit counter (L4UFCNT) provides a settable
breaker can be used as input to the function. In addition, counter with four independent limits where the number
the function can be used with an analog value of gas of positive and/or negative flanks on the input signal
pressure and temperature of the insulation medium and are counted against the setting values for limits. The
binary inputs. The function generates alarms based on output for each limit is activated when the counted
received information. value reaches that limit.
Insulation supervision for liquid medium SSIML

GUID-3B1A665F-60A5-4343-85F4-AD9C066CBE8D v8
Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.
Insulation supervision for liquid medium (SSIML) is used
for monitoring the oil insulated device condition. For Running hour-meter TEILGAPC GUID-464FB24F-B367-446C-963A-A14841943B87 v2
example, transformers, shunt reactors, and so on. Binary The Running hour-meter (TEILGAPC) function is a
information based on the liquid level in the circuit function that accumulates the elapsed time when a
breaker can be used as input to the function. In addition, given binary signal has been high.
the function can be used with an analog value of liquid
The main features of TEILGAPC are:
level and temperature of the insulation medium and
binary inputs. The function generates alarms based on
the received information.

Version 2.2
• Applicable to very long time accumulation (≤ 99999.9

hours) Voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAIGUID-868ED1BB-A921-45DE-94C4-0CF23ECD9ADA v1
• Supervision of limit transgression conditions and Voltage harmonic monitoring function VHMMHAI is used
rollover/overflow to monitor the voltage part of the power quality of a
• Possibility to define a warning and alarm with the system. It calculates the total harmonic distortion (THD)
resolution of 0.1 hours with respect to the fundamental signal amplitude which
• Retain any saved accumulation value at a restart indicates the voltage signal quality factor.
• Possibilities for blocking and reset
Additionally, the function is used to calculate the
• Possibility for manual addition of accumulated time
numerical multiple of rated frequency harmonics
• Reporting of the accumulated time
amplitude and harmonic distortion upto the 5th order. It
helps the user to know the predominant harmonic
Through fault monitoring PTRSTHR GUID-D5A0DC68-B3FD-4EBE-A5ED-68BE7DA20245 v2
frequencies order and their amplitudes present in the
The through fault monitoring function PTRSTHR is used system. The function also calculates the crest factor to
to monitor the mechanical stress on a transformer and indicate the effectiveness of the signal. All calculations
place it against its designed withstand capability. in the harmonic monitoring function are based on IEEE
During through faults, the fault-current magnitude is 1459 and IEEE 519 standards.
higher as the allowed overload current range. At low
fault current magnitudes which are below the overload The voltage harmonic function monitors the harmonic
capability of the transformer, mechanical effects are distortion value constantly. Whenever these value
considered less important unless the frequency of fault crosses their set limit levels, a warning signal will be
occurrence is high. Since through fault current initiated. If the warning signal persists continuously for
magnitudes are typically closer to the extreme design the set time, an alarm signal will be generated.
capabilities of the transformer, mechanical effects are
more significant than thermal effects.
17. Metering
For other power system objects, for example, an over-
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT
head line, this function can be used to make a log of M13394-3 v7
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally
primary quantities of a protected line.
generated binary pulses, for instance pulses coming
from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
Current harmonic monitoring CHMMHAI GUID-CD97D6CF-7343-416B-82D3-8352FFF9D73E v1
Current harmonic monitoring function CHMMHAI is used consumption values. The pulses are captured by the
to monitor the current part of the power quality of a binary input module and then read by the PCFCNT
system. It calculates the total harmonic distortion (THD) function. A scaled service value is available over the
with respect to fundamental signal amplitude, and the station bus. The special Binary input module with
total demand distortion (TDD) with respect to maximum enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered
demand load current. These indices indicate the current to achieve this functionality.
signal quality factor.
Function for energy calculation and demand
Additionally, the function is used to calculate the handling ETPMMTR GUID-6898E29B-DA70-421C-837C-1BBED8C63A7A v3
numerical multiple of rated frequency harmonics Power system measurement (CVMMXN) can be used to
measure active as well as reactive power values.
amplitude and harmonic distortion upto the 5th order. It
Function for energy calculation and demand handling
helps the user to know the predominant harmonic
(ETPMMTR) uses measured active and reactive power as
frequencies order and their amplitudes present in the
input and calculates the accumulated active and reactive
system. The function also calculates the crest factor to
energy pulses, in forward and reverse direction. Energy
indicate the effectiveness of the signal. All calculations
values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum
in the harmonic monitoring function are based on IEEE
demand power values are also calculated by the
1459 and IEEE 519 standards.
function. This function includes zero point clamping to
The current harmonic function monitors the harmonic remove noise from the input signal. As output of this
distortion and demand distortion values constantly. function: periodic energy calculations, integration of
Whenever these value crosses their set limit levels, a energy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarm
warning signal will be initiated. If the warning signal signals for limit violation of energy values and maximum
persists continuously for the set time, an alarm signal power demand, can be found.
will be generated.
The values of active and reactive energies are calculated
from the input power values by integrating them over a
selected time tEnergy. The integration of active and
reactive energy values will happen in both forward and
Version 2.2
reverse directions. These energy values are available as The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.
output signals and also as pulse outputs. Integration of
energy values can be controlled by inputs (STARTACC
and STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset to
19. Basic IED functions
initial values with RSTACC input. Time synchronization M11344-3 v11
The time synchronization function is used to select a
The maximum demand for active and reactive powers
common source of absolute time for the synchronization
are calculated for the set time interval tEnergy and
of the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This
these values are updated every minute through output
makes it possible to compare events and disturbance
channels. The active and reactive maximum power
data between all IEDs within a station automation
demand values are calculated for both forward and
system and in between sub-stations. A common source
reverse direction and these values can be reset with
shall be used for IED and merging unit when IEC/UCA
RSTDMD input.
61850-9-2LE process bus communication is used.
M11345-3 v12
Precision time protocol PTP

18. Human machine interface
PTP according to IEEE 1588-2008 and specifically its
Local HMI AMU0600442 v15
profile IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3 for power utility automation
is a synchronization method that can be used to
maintain a common time within a station. This time can
be synchronized to the global time using, for instance, a
GPS receiver. If PTP is enabled on the IEDs and the
switches that connect the station are compatible with
IEEE 1588, the station will become synchronized to one
common time with an accuracy of under 1us. Using an
IED as a boundary clock between several networks will
keep 1us accuracy on three levels or when using an HSR,
15 IEDs can be connected in a ring without losing a
single microsecond in accuracy.
20. Ethernet
Access points GUID-6E5D2696-A8EE-43E7-A94B-69C3D0612127 v2

An access point is an Ethernet communication interface
for single or redundant station communication. Each
access point is allocated with one physical Ethernet
port, two physical Ethernet ports are allocated if
redundant communication is activated for the access
point.
Device 1 Device 1
AP1 AP2 AP3 AP1 AP2 AP3
Figure 16. Local human-machine interface SFP_301 SFP_302 SFP_303 SFP_301 SFP_302 SFP_303
The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements Figure 17. Access points, non redundant (left) and redundant
• Graphical display capable of showing a user defined communication (right)
single line diagram and provide an interface for
controlling switchgear.
• Navigation buttons and five user defined command DHCP is available for the front port, and a device
buttons to shortcuts in the HMI tree or simple connected to it can thereby obtain an automatically
commands. assigned IP-address.
• 15 user defined three-color LEDs.
Access points diagnostics
• Communication port for PCM600. GUID-20F64A6D-AA8C-47D7-AA7D-4810996B2FF2 v2
The access point diagnostics function blocks (RCHLCCH,
SCHLCCH and FRONTSTATUS) supervise
Version 2.2
communication. SCHLCCH is used for communication Substation Automation (SA) bus or Substation
over the rear Ethernet ports, RCHLCCH is used for Monitoring (SM) bus.
redundant communications over the rear Ethernet ports
and FRONTSTATUS is used for communication over the Available communication protocols are:
front port. All access point function blocks include
• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
output signal for denial of service.
• IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
Redundant communication • LON communication protocol
GUID-A90FDBA7-D4D7-4CBD-9F05-13DCC9971779 v8
• SPA communication protocol
PRP IEC 62439-3 redundant communication • IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Redundant communication according to IEC 62439-3 • DNP 3.0 communication protocol
PRP-0 and IEC 62439-3 PRP-1 parallel redundancy
protocol (PRP) is available as an option when ordering Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
IEDs. PRP according to IEC 62439-3 uses two optical/
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
Galvanic(RJ45) Ethernet ports. M14787-3 v16
IEC 61850 Ed.1 or Ed.2 can be chosen by a setting in
HSR IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy PCM600. The IED is equipped with up to six (order
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC dependent) optical Ethernet rear ports for IEC 61850-8-1
62439-3 Edition 2 High-availability seamless redundancy station bus communication. The IEC 61850-8-1
(HSR) is available as an option when ordering IEDs. communication is also possible from the electrical
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC Ethernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows
62439-3 uses two optical/Galvanic(RJ45) Ethernet ports. intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from different
vendors to exchange information and simplifies system
The HSR ring supports the connection of up to 30 relays. engineering. IED-to-IED communication using GOOSE
If more than 30 relays are to be connected, it is and client-server communication over MMS are
recommended to split the network into several rings to supported. Disturbance recording file (COMTRADE)
guarantee the performance for real-time applications. uploading can be done over MMS or FTP.
Routes GUID-95F9C7BA-92F8-489F-AD0A-047410B5E66F v1
A route is a specified path for data to travel between the
The front port is only intended for
PCM600 communication, maintenance,
source device in a subnetwork to the destination device
training and test purposes due to risk
in a different subnetwork. A route consists of a
of interference during normal
destination address and the address of the gateway to
operation.
be used when sending data to the destination device,
see Figure 18.
IEC 61850 quality expander QUALEXPGUID-9C5DC78E-041B-422B-9668-320E62B847A2 v1

The quality expander component is used to display the
detailed quality of an IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE analog
channel. The component expands the channel quality
output of a Merging Unit analog channel received in the
Default gateway
IED as per the IEC 61850-7-3 standard. This component
can be used during the ACT monitoring to get the
particular channel quality of the Merging Unit.
Gateway
Supervision of GOOSE subscription (ALGOS)

GUID-8EF4A900-FE3D-4111-8914-FC4EEE6AB711 v1
Source Destination
ALGOS reports the status of GOOSE communication to a
client according to IEC 61850.
Figure 18. Route from source to destination through gateway
There should be one instance of ALGOS in an IED for
each data set that the IED receives from other IEDs.
Each ALGOS reports the status of the receiving GOOSE
21. Station communication communication.
Communication protocols All attributes, both mandatory and optional, according

M14815-3 v14
Each IED is provided with several communication to IEC 61850-7-4 Ed. 2.0 are supported.
interfaces enabling it to connect to one or many
substation level systems or equipment, either on the

Version 2.2
ALGOS is not defined in IEC 61850 Ed. 1

Measurands user-defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
and is only supported in Ed. 2 mode.
I103MEASUSR
I103MEASUSR is a function block with user-defined input
measurands in monitor direction. These function blocks
Supervision of sampled value (IEC 61850-9-2LE) include the FunctionType parameter for each block in
subscription (ALSVS) GUID-7895C2C7-FA77-4717-8A43-C6F6B5C9E52F v1
the private range, and the Information number
ALSVS reports the status of sampled value parameter for each block.
communication to a client according to IEC 61850.
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR
There should be one instance of ALSVS in an IED for each I103AR is a function block with defined functions for
sampled value data stream that the IED receives. Each autorecloser indications in monitor direction. This block
ALSVS reports the status of one receiving sampled value includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
data stream. information number parameter is defined for each
output signal.
The attributes St and SimSt are supported as well as the
setting SvCBRef, according to IEC 61850-7-4 Ed. 2.0. Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for
ALSVS is not defined in IEC 61850 Ed. 1 earth fault indications in monitor direction. This block
and is only supported in Ed. 2 mode. includes the FunctionType parameter; the information
number parameter is defined for each output signal.
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
GUID-C3AA21B4-730F-4327-943A-3C77102A80A0 v4 I103FLTPROT
Optical Ethernet port communication standard IEC/UCA I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor
61850-9-2LE for process bus is supported. IEC/UCA direction. Each input on the function block is specific for
61850-9-2LE allows Non Conventional Instrument a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to
Transformers (NCIT) with Merging Units (MUs) or stand- a correspondent signal present in the configuration. For
alone MUs to exchange information with the IED, and example: 68_TRGEN represents the General Trip of the
simplifies SA engineering. IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE uses device and must be connected to the general trip signal
the same port as IEC 61850-8-1. SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.
LON communication protocol SEMOD120140-5 v3 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED
Existing stations with ABB station bus LON can be I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in
extended with use of the optical LON interface (glass or monitor direction. This block uses the parameter
plastic). This allows full SA functionality including peer- FunctionType; the information number parameter is
to-peer messaging and cooperation between the IEDs. defined for each input signal.
SPA communication protocol SEMOD120134-5 v1 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV
A single glass or plastic port is provided for the ABB SPA I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions
protocol. This allows extensions of simple substation for supervision indications in monitor direction. This
automation systems but the main use is for Substation block includes the FunctionType parameter; the
Monitoring Systems SMS. information number parameter is defined for each
output signal.
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol SEMOD120137-5 v4
A single glass or plastic port is provided for the IEC Status for user-defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
60870-5-103 standard. This allows design of simple I103USRDEF
substation automation systems including equipment I103USRDEF comprises function blocks with user-
from different vendors. Disturbance files uploading is defined input signals in monitor direction. These
provided. function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for
each block in the private range, and the information
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS
number parameter for each input signal.
103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid
measuring types depending on the connected signals. Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD
The set of connected inputs will control which ASDUs I103CMD is a command function block in control
(Application Service Data Units) are generated. direction with pre-defined output signals. The signals
are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in
case of restart.

Version 2.2
as interface for horizontal peer-to-peer communication

IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD (over LON only).
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction
with defined IED functions. All outputs are pulsed and
they are NOT stored. Pulse-time is a hidden parameter. 22. Remote communication
Function commands user-defined for IEC 60870-5-103 Analog and binary signal transfer to remote end M12449-6 v3
I103USRCMD Three analog and eight binary signals can be exchanged

I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction between two IEDs. This functionality is mainly used for
with user-defined output signals. These function blocks the line differential protection. However it can be used
include the FunctionType parameter for each block in in other products as well. An IED can communicate with
the private range, and the Information number up to 4 remote IEDs.
parameter for each output signal.
Binary signal transfer SEMOD52522-4 v10
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 The remote end data communication is used for the
I103GENCMD transmission of analog values for line differential
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic protection or for the transmission of only binary signals
commands over IEC 60870-5-103. The function has two between IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable
output signals, CMD_OFF and CMD_ON, that can be used and can thus be used for any purpose, such as
to implement double-point command schemes. communication scheme related signals, transfer trip
and/or other binary signals between IEDs.
The I103GENCMD component can be configured as
either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2 steady ON/OFF outputs. Communication between two IEDs requires that each
The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2, IED is equipped with a Line Data Communication Module
while the OFF output is pulsed with a command with (LDCM). The LDCM then acts as an interface to 64 kbit/s
value 1. If in steady mode is ON asserted and OFF and 2Mbit/s communication channels for duplex
deasserted with command 2 and vice versa with communication between the IEDs. In 2Mbit/s mode,
command 1. each LDCM can send and receive up to 9 analog and up
to 192 binary signals simultaneously. In 64kbit/s mode,
IED commands with position and select for IEC the LDCM can be configured to work in either analog
60870-5-103 I103POSCMD mode or binary mode. In analog mode, the IED can send
I103POSCMD has double-point position indicators that and receive up to 3 analog signals and up to 8 binary
are getting the position value as an integer (for signals. In binary mode, the LDCM can send and receive
example, from the POSITION output of the SCSWI only binary data (up to 192 binary signals).
function block) and sending it over IEC 60870-5-103
(1=OPEN; 2=CLOSE). The standard does not define the The IED can be equipped with up to four short range,
use of values 0 and 3. However, when connected to a medium range or long range LDCMs.
switching device, these values are transmitted.
Line data communication module, short, medium
The BLOCK input will block only the signals in and long range LDCM SEMOD168481-4 v11
monitoring direction (the position information), not the The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for
commands via IEC 60870-5-103. The SELECT input is communication between the IEDs situated at a distance
used to indicate that the monitored apparatus has been <110 km/68 miles or from the IED to the optical-to-
selected (in a select-before-operate type of control). electrical converter with G.703 or G.703E1 interface
located at a distance < 3 km/1.9 miles away. The LDCM
DNP3.0 communication protocol SEMOD153688-5 v3
module sends and receives data to and from another
An electrical RS485 serial port, optical serial ports on the LDCM module. The IEEE/ANSI C37.94 standard format is
serial communication module (SLM), optical Ethernet used.
ports are available for DNP3.0 communication. DNP3.0
Level 2 communication with unsolicited events, time Galvanic X.21 line data communication module X.21-
synchronization and disturbance reporting is provided LDCM GUID-3C6C7DAC-1DB1-4CB8-991F-3B1D86551F28 v3
for communication to RTUs, Gateways or HMI systems. A module with built-in galvanic X.21 converter which e.g.
can be connected to modems for pilot wires is also
Multiple command and transmit M14791-3 v3
available.
When IEDs are used in Substation Automation systems
with LON, SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication Galvanic interface G.703 resp G.703E1 M16035-3 v5
protocols, the Event and Multiple Command function The external galvanic data communication converter
blocks are used as the communication interface for G.703/G.703E1 makes an optical-to-galvanic conversion
vertical communication to station HMI and gateway, and for connection to a multiplexer. These units are
Version 2.2
designed for 64 kbit/s resp 2Mbit/s operation. The transducers. The module has six independent,
converter is delivered with 19” rack mounting galvanically separated channels.
accessories.
Optical Ethernet module
M16073-3 v9
The optical Ethernet module (OEM) provides two
23. Hardware description additional optical Ethernet ports. The port connectors
are of optical (type LC) or galvanic (type RJ45) Ethernet
Hardware modules IP14529-1 v1 ports.
Numeric processing module NUM
M12643-3 v4
The numeric processing module (NUM) is a CPU module Serial and LON communication module (SLM) for SPA/IEC
that handles all protection functions and logic. 60870-5-103, LON and DNP 3.0
M14933-3 v6
The Serial and LON communication module (SLM) is
NUM provides up to 4 optical (type LC) or galvanic (type
used for SPA, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 and LON
RJ45) Ethernet ports(one basic and three optional).
communication. SLM has two optical communication
Power supply module PSM ports for plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or glass/glass
M11595-3 v6
The power supply module is used to provide the correct fiber cables. One port is used for serial communication
internal voltages and full isolation between the IED and (SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 port) and the other port
the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is is used for LON communication.
available.
Line data communication module LDCM
M16075-3 v6
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type Each module has one optical port, one for each remote
can be ordered. end to which the IED communicates.
Binary input module BIM Alternative modules are:

M1769-3 v4
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs
Short range LDCM (820 nm multi mode fiber),
and is available in two versions, one standard and one
with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs Medium range (1310 nm single mode fiber)
to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary
inputs are freely programmable and can be used for the and Long range (1550 nm single mode fiber) .
input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can
also be included in the disturbance recording and event- Galvanic RS485 serial communication module
SEMOD158664-5 v3
recording functions. This enables extensive monitoring The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is
and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all used for DNP3.0 and IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
associated electrical circuits. The module has one RS485 communication port. The
RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be
Binary output module BOM used either in 2-wire or 4-wire connections. A 2-wire
M6938-3 v4
The binary output module has 24 independent output connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a
relays and is used for trip output or any signaling multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or
purpose. slave. This variant requires however a control of the
output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for
Static binary output module SOM RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated
SEMOD174196-4 v5
The static binary output module has six fast heavy-duty Master and the rest are slaves. No special control signal
static outputs and six change over output relays for use is needed in this case.
in applications with high speed requirements.
GPS time synchronization module GTM
M14851-3 v5
Binary input/output module IOM This module includes a GPS receiver used for time
M6939-3 v6
The binary input/output module is used when only a few synchronization. The GTM has one SMA contact for
input and output channels are needed. The ten standard connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS
output channels are used for trip output or any signaling ST-connector output.
purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are
used for applications where short operating time is IRIG-B Time synchronizing module
SEMOD141113-4 v9
essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for
required binary input information. accurate time synchronizing of the IED from a station
clock.
mA input module MIM
M15020-3 v4
The milli-ampere input module is used to interface The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input is supported.
transducer signals in the –20 to +20 mA range from for
example OLTC position, temperature or pressure Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and
12X IRIG-B support.
Version 2.2
Transformer input module TRM

M14875-3 v10
The transformer input module is used to galvanically
separate and adapt the secondary currents and voltages
generated by the measuring transformers. The module
has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents
and voltage inputs.
Ring lug or compression type connectors can be

ordered.
High impedance resistor unit

M16727-3 v2
The high impedance resistor unit, with resistors for
pick-up value setting and a voltage dependent resistor,
is available in a single phase unit and a three phase unit.
Both are mounted on a 1/1 19 inch apparatus plate with
compression type terminals.
Layout and dimensions IP14539-1 v1

Dimensions
IP14826-1
M15243-4 v1
v7
IEC08000165‐3‐en.vsdx
Figure 20. Case with rear cover and 19” rack mounting kit
IEC08000163‐3‐en.vsdx
Figure 19. Case with rear cover IEC06000182 V2 EN-US
Figure 21. A 1/2 x 19” size IED side-by-side with RHGS6.
M15243-12 v11
Table 11. Case dimensions
Case size A B C D E F G H I
(mm)/
(inches)
6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9/ 223.7/ 247.5/ 255.0/ 205.8/ 190.5/ 466.5/ 232.5/ 482.6/
10.47 8.81 9.74 10.04 8.10 7.50 18.36 9.15 19
6U, 3/4 x 19” 265.9/ 335.9/ 247.5/ 255.0/ 318.0/ 190.5/ 466.5/ 232.5/ 482.6/
10.47 13.23 9.74 10.04 12.52 7.50 18.36 9.15 19
6U, 1/1 x 19” 265.9/ 448.0/ 247.5/ 255.0/ 430.1/ 190.5/ 466.5/ 232.5/ 482.6/
10.47 17.65 9.74 10.04 16.86 7.50 18.36 9.15 19

Version 2.2
Table 11. Case dimensions, continued

Case size A B C D E F G H I
(mm)/
(inches)
The G and H dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit.
Mounting alternatives
M16079-3 v14
• 19” rack mounting kit
• Flush mounting kit with cut-out dimensions:
– 1/2 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 210.1 mm/
8.27”
– 3/4 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 322.4 mm/
12.69”
– 1/1 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 434.7 mm/
17.11”
• Wall mounting kit
See ordering for details about available mounting

alternatives.

Version 2.2
24. Connection diagrams GUID-CF4EFFA5-3081-4FC7-9A14-ED127C3C0FDE v8

The connection diagrams are delivered in the IED
Connectivity package as part of the product delivery.
The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be

downloaded from
http://www.abb.com/protection-control.
Connection diagrams for IEC Customized products
Connection diagram, 670 series 2.2 1MRK002801-AG
Connection diagrams for Configured products
Connection diagram, RED670 2.2, B33X00

1MRK002807-DF
Connection diagram, RED670 2.2, A42X00

1MRK002807-DG
Connection diagram, RED670 2.2, B42X00

1MRK002807-DH
Connection diagram, RED670 2.2, C42X00

1MRK002807-DK
Connection diagrams for ANSI Customized products
Connection diagram, 670 series 2.2 1MRK002802-AG
25. Certification GUID-35BB6AD3-4DCC-404E-87B5-10853D32AB4E v1

The following are the list of certification for Relion® 670
series.
UL certification* for ABB E502400

Relion® 670 series
IEC 60255-1 Environmental & 1418-18

functional issued by DNV GL 1446-18
IEC 61850 Ed2 level A1 10175313-INC 20-2185rev1

certificate issued by DNV GL
IEC 61850 Ed1 level B1 1KHL050130

certificate issued by ABB Power
Grids Switzerland Ltd,
System Verification and
Validation Center, SVC Baden
IEC 60870-5-103 certificate 10021419-OPE/INC 16-2490

issued by DNV GL
DNP 3.0 certificate issued by 10021419-OPE/INC 16-2532

DNV GL
* Valid for IEDs produced at factory in Sweden.

Version 2.2
26. Technical data
General M10993-1 v4 IP11376-1 v3
Definitions
Reference value The specified value of an influencing factor to which are referred the characteristics of the equipment
Nominal range The range of values of an influencing quantity (factor) within which, under specified conditions, the equipment meets
the specified requirements
Operative range The range of values of a given energizing quantity for which the equipment, under specified conditions, is able to
perform its intended functions according to the specified requirements
5. Parameter UBase used by the tested function is set

equal to the rated primary phase-to-phase voltage.
6. Parameter SBase used by the tested function is set
equal to:
• Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated – √3 × IBase × UBase
simultaneously with influencing factors within 7. The rated secondary quantities have the following
nominal range. values:
• The stated operate time for functions include the – Rated secondary phase current I r is either 1 A or 5 A
operating time for the binary inputs and outputs. depending on selected TRM.
• Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously – Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage U r is
with influencing factors within nominal range. After 6
within the range from 100 V to 120 V.
ms an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The
– Rated secondary power for three-phase system S r =
activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed
√3 × Ur × Ir
200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1 s.
8. For operate and reset time testing, the default
Continued activation is possible with respect to
setting values of the function and BOM module are
current consumption but after 5 minutes the
used if not explicitly stated otherwise.
temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware
All reset times are measured using BOM output
life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM/SOM should
contacts if not explicitly stated otherwise. The
be activated continuously due to power dissipation.
operate/reset times are determined by
BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated continuously due
characteristics of the output module used.
to power dissipation.
9. During testing, signals with rated frequency have
• Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM/SOM should be
been injected if not explicitly stated otherwise.
activated continuously due to power dissipation. The
1 All declared operate times are with BOM module
stated operate time for functions include the
0. unless specified. All the declared operate (trip) times
operating time for the binary inputs and outputs.
can be reduced by 3-4 ms when using SOM module.
Presumptions for Technical Data
GUID-1E949E38-E04D-4374-A086-912C25E9F93C v3
The technical data stated in this document are only valid
under the following circumstances:
1. Main current transformers with 1 A or 2 A secondary

rating are wired to the IED 1 A rated CT inputs.
2. Main current transformer with 5 A secondary rating
are wired to the IED 5 A rated CT inputs.
3. CT and VT ratios in the IED are set in accordance with
the associated main instrument transformers. Note
that for functions which measure an analogue signal
which do not have corresponding primary quantity
the 1:1 ratio shall be set for the used analogue inputs
on the IED. Example of such functions are: HZPDIF,
ROTIPHIZ and STTIPHIZ.
4. Parameter IBase used by the tested function is set
equal to the rated CT primary current.

Version 2.2
Energizing quantities, rated values and limits

Analog inputs
M16988-1 v11 IP15842-1 v1
Table 12. TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz
Operating range fr ± 10%
Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A
Operating range (0-100) x Ir
Thermal withstand 100 × Ir for 1 s *)

30 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min
4 × Ir continuously
Dynamic withstand 250 × Ir one half wave
Burden < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.
Voltage inputs **)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V
Operating range 0 - 340 V
Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s

420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V

< 80 mVA at 220 V
**) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency

Version 2.2
Table 13. TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz
Operating range fr ± 10%
Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1A 5A
Operating range (0-1.8) × Ir (0-1.6) × Ir
Thermal withstand 80 × Ir for 1 s 65 × Ir for 1 s

25 × Ir for 10 s 20 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min 8 × Ir for 1 min
1.8 × Ir for 30 min 1.6 × Ir for 30 min
1.1 × Ir continuously 1.1 × Ir continuously
Burden < 200 mVA at Ir < 350 mVA at Ir
Voltage inputs *)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V
Operating range 0 - 340 V
Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s

420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V

< 80 mVA at 220 V
*) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency
M6389-1 v5
Table 14. MIM - mA input module
Quantity: Rated value: Nominal range:
Input resistance Rin = 194 Ohm -
Input range ±5, ±10, ±20 mA -

0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20 mA
Power consumption -
each mA board £2W
each mA input £ 0.1 W
Auxiliary DC voltage
M12286-1 v9 IP15843-1 v3
Table 15. PSM - Power supply module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Auxiliary DC voltage, EL (input) EL = (24-60) V EL ±20%

EL = (90-250) V EL ±20%
Power consumption 50 W typically -
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 10 A during 0.1 s -
Supply interruption bridging time < 50 ms -

Version 2.2
Binary inputs and outputs

M12576-1 v13 IP15844-1 v1
Table 16. BIM - Binary input module
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%

48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz

Release settable 1–30 Hz
*Debounce filter Settable 1–20 ms
Binary input operate time 3 ms -

(Debounce filter set to 0 ms)
* Note: For compliance with surge immunity a debounce filter time setting of 5 ms is required.
M50609-2 v10
Table 17. BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Binary inputs 16 -

48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz

Release settable 1–30 Hz
*Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms


Version 2.2
Table 18. IOM - Binary input/output module
Binary inputs 8 -

48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption -
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1-40 Hz

Release settable 1-30 Hz
*Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms


Version 2.2
M12318-1 v11
Table 19. IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-1)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay)
Binary outputs 10 21)
Max system voltage 250 V AC/DC 250 V DC
Min load voltage 24 V DC —
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms 800 V DC
Current carrying capacity

Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A 12 A
Making capacity for DC with L/R > 10 ms:
0.2 s
1.0 s 30 A 0.4 A
10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load

220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos φ > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A

(According to IEC 61810-1) 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
Max operations with inductive load L/R ≤ 40 ms 1000
Max operations with resistive load 2000
Max operations with no load 10000
Operating time < 6 ms <= 1 ms
1) These reed relays have been excluded from UL evaluation.

Version 2.2
M12584-1 v11
Table 20. IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA - contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-1)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC/ DC 250 V DC
Min load voltage 24 V DC -
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 250 V rms 250 V rms

Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A 12 A

0.2 s
1.0 s 30 A 0.4 A
10 A 0.4 A

220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A

(According to IEC 61810-1) 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
Max operations with inductive load L/R ≤ 40 ms 1000 -
Max operations with no load 10000 -
Operating time < 6 ms <= 1 ms

Version 2.2
SEMOD175395-2 v11
Table 21. SOM - Static Output Module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-1): Heavy duty static binary outputs
Function of quantity Static binary output trip
Max system voltage 250 V DC
Number of outputs 6
Impedance open state High impedance
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 350 V rms
Current carrying capacity:

Continuous 6A
1.0 s 20 A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum

capacitance of 0.2 μF:
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 20 A

0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 20 A

0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 20 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40 ms 24-60 V / 30 A

(Auto-reclose scheme) (On ≤ 0.2 s) 110-125 V / 20 A
0.2 s – on 220-250 V / 10 A
0.2 s – off
0.2 s – on
20 s – off
0.2 s – on
30 s – off
0.2 s – on
120 s – off (for thermal dissipation)
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40 ms 6A

(According to IEC 61810-1)
4 operations/min and 2 min pause for thermal dissipation
Max operations with resistive load (On ≤ 0.2 s) 10000
Operating time < 1 ms

Version 2.2
Table 22. SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-1): Electromechanical relay outputs
Function of quantity Trip and signal relays
Max system voltage 250 V AC/DC
Min load voltage 24 V DC
Number of outputs 6
Current carrying capacity:

Continuous 8A
1.0 s 10 A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum

capacitance of 0.2 μF:
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A

0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A

0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos ϕ > 0.4 250 V / 8 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40 ms 48 V / 1 A

(According to IEC 61810-1) 110 V / 0.4 A
125 V / 0.35 A
220 V / 0.2 A
250 V / 0.15 A
Max operations with inductive load L/R ≤ 40 ms 1 000
Max operations with resistive load 2 000
Max operations with no load 10 000

Version 2.2
M12441-1 v11
Table 23. BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-1)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC/DC
Min load voltage 24V DC

Per relay, continuous 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A
Max operations with load 1000

0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A

0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A

110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Influencing factors
M16705-1 v17 IP15846-1 v1
Table 24. Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence
Ambient temperature, operate +20±5°C -25°C to +55°C 0.02%/°C

value
Relative humidity 45-75% 10-90% -

Operative range 0-95%
Storage temperature - -40°C to +70°C -

Version 2.2
Table 25. Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation
Dependence on Reference value Within nominal Influence

range
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage max. 2% 15% of EL 0.01%/%

Operative range Full wave
rectified
Auxiliary voltage dependence, ±20% of EL 0.01%/%

operate value
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24-60 V DC ± 20%
90-250 V DC ± 20%
Interruption
interval
0–50 ms No restart
0–∞ s Correct behaviour at power down
Restart time < 300 s
Table 26. Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–1)
Dependence on Within nominal range Influence
Frequency dependence, operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±1.0%/Hz

fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
Frequency dependence for distance protection operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±2.0%/Hz
fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
Harmonic frequency dependence (20% content) 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±2.0%
Harmonic frequency dependence for distance protection (10% 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±10.0%
content)
Harmonic frequency dependence for high impedance differential 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±10.0%
protection (10% content)
Harmonic frequency dependence for overcurrent protection 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±3.0%

Version 2.2
Type tests according to standards M16706-1 v15 IP15778-1 v1
Table 27. Electromagnetic compatibility
Test Type test values Reference standards
1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-26
100 kHz slow damped oscillatory wave immunity test 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Level 3
Ring wave immunity test, 100 kHz 2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Level 4
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEC 60255-26

Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Level 4
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEEE/ANSI C37.90.3

Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge
Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 60255-26, Zone A

2 kV, SFP galvanic RJ45
2 kV, MIM mA-inputs IEC 60255-26, Zone B
Surge immunity test 2-4 kV, 1.2/50ms high energy IEC 60255-26, Zone A
1-2 kV, BOM and IRF outputs IEC 60255-26, Zone B
Power frequency immunity test 150-300 V, 50 Hz IEC 60255-26, Zone A
Conducted common mode immunity test 30-3 V, 15-150 Hz IEC 61000-4-16, Level 4
Power frequency magnetic field test 1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Level 5
100 A/m, cont.
Pulse magnetic field immunity test 1000 A/m IEC 61000–4–9, Level 5
Damped oscillatory magnetic field test 100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Level 5
Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance 20 V/m IEC 60255-26

80-1000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
1.4-2.7 GHz EN 50121-5
10 V/m, 2.7-6.0 GHz
Radiated emission 30-6000 MHz IEC 60255-26
30-8500 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC
Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26
Table 28. Insulation
Test Type test values Reference standard
Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-27

1.0 kV AC, 1 min.: ANSI C37.90
-SFP galvanic RJ45 IEEE 802.3-2015, Environment A
- X.21-LDCM
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50ms, 0.5 J

1 kV, 1.2/50 ms 0.5 J:
-SFP galvanic RJ45
- X.21-LDCM
Insulation resistance > 100 MW at 500 VDC

Version 2.2
Table 29. Environmental conditions
Description Value
Operating temperature range -25°C to +55°C (continuous)
Short-time service temperature range -40°C to +70°C (<16h)

Note: Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance outside the
temperature range of -25°C to +55°C
Relative humidity <93%, non-condensing
Atmospheric pressure 86 kPa to 106 kPa
Altitude up to 2000 m
Transport and storage temperature range -40°C to +85°C
Table 30. Environmental tests
Test Type test value Reference standard
Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at -25°C IEC 60068-2-1
Cold storage test Test Ab for 16 h at -40°C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at +70°C IEC 60068-2-2
Dry heat storage test Test Bb for 16 h at +85°C IEC 60068-2-2
Change of temperature test Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25°C to +70°C IEC 60068-2-14
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 56 days at +40°C and humidity 93% IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55°C and humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle IEC 60068-2-30
= 24 hours)
Table 31. CE compliance
Test According to
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) EN 60255–26
Low voltage (LVD) EN 60255–27
Table 32. Mechanical tests
Test Type test values Reference standards
Vibration response test Class II: Rack mount IEC 60255-21-1

Class I: Flush and wall mount
Vibration endurance test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class II: Rack mount IEC 60255-21-3

Class I: Flush and wall mount

Version 2.2
Differential protection M13062-1 v22
Table 33. Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic Adaptable ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% -
Minimum pickup, IdMin (4.0-100.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Directional characteristic Fixed 180 degrees or ±60 to ±119 ±2.0 degrees

degrees
Operate time, trip at 0 to 10 x IdMin Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, trip at 10 x IdMin to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Second harmonic blocking 40.0% of fundamental ±1.0% of Ir
M13081-1 v13
Table 34. High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF
Operate voltage (10-900) V ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

I=U/R ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio >95% at (30-900) V -
Maximum continuous power See1) -
Operate time at 0 to 10 x Ud Min. = 5 ms

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 x Ud to 0 Min. = 75 ms

Max. = 95 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Ud Min. = 25 ms

Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at 2 x Ud to 0 Min. = 50 ms

Max. = 70 ms
Critical impulse time 15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Ud -
1) The value U 2Trip/ R should always be lower than Stabilizing resistor thermal rating to allow continuous activation during testing. If this value is exceeded, testing should be
done with a transient faults. Typical value for the thermal rating of the resistor is 100W.

Version 2.2
M16023-1 v12
Table 35. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF single IED without communication
Minimum operate current (20-200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

SlopeSection2 (10.0-50.0)% -
EndSection 1 (20–150)% of IBase -
Unrestrained limit function (100–5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Second harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±1.0% of Ir

Note: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir
Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir

*Inverse characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 196,198 and table 200
196,198 and table 200
Critical impulse time 2ms typically at 0 to 10 x IdMin -
Charging current compensation On/Off -
LT3CPDIF and LT6CPDIF (With in-zone transformer enabled and tIdMinHigh set to 0) :
*Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 25 ms -

0 to 10 x IdMin Max. = 35 ms
*Reset time, restrained function at 10 Min. = 5 ms -

x IdMinto 0 Max. = 15 ms
*Operate time, unrestrained function Min. = 5 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdUnre Max. = 15 ms
*Reset time, unrestrained function at Min. = 15 ms -

10 x IdUnreto 0 Max. = 30 ms
**Operate time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -

sequence function Max. = 25 ms
**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -

L3CPDIF and L6CPDIF (With tIdMinHigh set to 0):





Version 2.2
Table 35. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF single IED without communication , continued


The data in the table are valid for a single IED with two local current input groups.
*Note: Data obtained with single three-phase input current group.
**Note: Data obtained with two three-phase input current groups. The rated symmetrical currents are applied on both sides as pre- and
post-fault currents. The fault is performed by increasing one phase current to double on one side and decreasing same phase current to
zero on the other side.

Version 2.2
Table 36. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF with 64 Kbit/s communication




196,198 and table 200
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x IdMin -











Version 2.2
Table 36. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF with 64 Kbit/s communication , continued


The data in the table are valid for a single IED with 64 Kbits/s communication in the loop-back mode.
*Note: Data obtained with single three-phase input current group. The operate and reset times for L3CPDIF are valid for an static output
from SOM.

Version 2.2
Table 37. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF with 2 Mbits/s communication




196,198 and table 200
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x IdMin -









at 0 to 10 x Id Max. = 20 ms


Version 2.2
Table 37. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF with 2 Mbits/s communication , continued


The data in the table are valid for a single IED with 2 Mbits/s communication in loop-back mode.
*Note: Data obtained with single three-phase input current group.

Version 2.2
GUID-6746298E-4C29-44C6-AB59-41EBF408A5E4 v4
Table 38. High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3 line ends L4CPDIF with 2 Mbit/s communication

EndSection1 (20–200)% of IBase -
EndSection2 (100–1000)% of IBase -

Second harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of ±1.0% of Ir

fundamental Note: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir
Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of ±3.0% of Ir

fundamental Note: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x -

IdMin
Operate time with two input Min. = 10 ms -

groups' currents, restrained Max. = 20 ms
function, in a 50 Hz system1)
Operate time with two input Min. = 8 ms -

groups' currents, restrained Max. = 17 ms
1)
function, in a 60 Hz system
Operate time, restrained function Min. = 10 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdMin, in a 50 Hz system Max. = 20 ms
2)
Operate time, restrained function Min. = 8 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdMin, in a 60 Hz system Max. = 17 ms
2)
Reset time, restrained function at Min. = 45 ms -

10 x IdMin to 0
2)
Max. = 65 ms
Operate time, unrestrained Min. = 5 ms -

function at 0 to 10 x IdUnre2) Max. = 17 ms
Reset time, unrestrained function Min. = 45 ms -

at 10 x IdUnre to 0
2)
Max. = 65 ms
The data in the table are valid for single IED with 2 Mbit/s communication in loop-back mode.
The operate (trip) time is measured from general operate (trip) signal. In case of phase selective trip, the discrepancy between different
phases might be few milliseconds for a three-phase fault.
1) This data is obtained by applying two three-phase input groups' currents to simulate an internal fault with default settings. Ir is applied to both input groups as pre- and
post-fault currents. The fault is performed by simultaneously increasing one group's currents to 10 x IdMin and decreasing the other group's currents to 0.
2) This data is obtained by applying one three-phase input group's currents only.

Version 2.2
GUID-0BD8D3C9-620A-426C-BDB5-DAA0E4F8247F v4
Table 39. Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC
Operate current, zero sequence current (1-100)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir
Operate current, low current operation (1-100)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir
Operate voltage, phase to neutral (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate voltage, phase to phase (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Independent time delay, zero sequence current at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater
Independent time delay, low current operation at 2 x Iset to 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 40 ms

Independent time delay, low voltage operation at 2 x Uset to 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
Reset time delay for startup signal at 0 to 2 x Uset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms

Version 2.2
Impedance protection M13842-1 v15
Table 40. Distance measuring zone, Quad ZMQPDIS
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable -

direction
Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase -

current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, (10-1000)% of IBase -

phase-to-phase and phase-to-
earth
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) Ω/phase
Conditions:
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) Ω/phase Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, phase-to- (0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop

earth
Fault resistance, phase-to- (0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop

phase
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees -

measured with CVT’s
and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
Ph-E operation
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 Min. = 20 ms -

x Zreach Max. = 50 ms

Version 2.2
SEMOD173239-2 v10
Table 41. Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction -

current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, Ph- (10-1000)% of IBase -

Ph and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Fault resistance, Ph-E (0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph (0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured -

with CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is greater

Ph-E operation

M16024-1 v12
Table 42. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS

Reactive reach, positive (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.5% static accuracy

sequence ±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Resistive reach, positive (0.10–1000.00) Ω/phase
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
sequence
Reactive reach, zero sequence (0.50–9000.00) Ω/phase Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Resistive reach, zero sequence (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, phase-to- (1.00–9000.00) Ω/loop

earth faults, forward and
reverse
Fault resistance, phase-to- (0.50–3000.00) Ω/loop

phase faults, forward and
reverse
Load encroachment criteria:

Load resistance, forward and (1.00–3000.00) Ω/phase
reverse (5-70) degrees
Safety load impedance angle

Version 2.2
SEMOD173242-2 v14
Table 43. Full-scheme distance protection, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS
Number of zones, Ph-E Max 5 with selectable -

direction
Minimum operate current (10–30)% of IBase -
Positive sequence impedance, (0.005–3000.000) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Ph-E loop Conditions:
Positive sequence impedance (10–90) degrees
angle, Ph-E loop
Angle: 85 degrees
Reverse reach, Ph-E loop (0.005–3000.000) Ω/phase
(Magnitude)
Magnitude of earth return (0.00–3.00)

compensation factor KN
Angle for earth compensation (-180–180) degrees

factor KN

measured with CVT’s and
0.5<SIR<30
Ph-E operation
Reset time at 0.5 x Zreach to Min. = 30 ms -

1.5 x Zreach Max. = 50 ms
SEMOD173249-2 v8
Table 44. Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults ZMMPDIS
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate current (10-30)% of IBase -
Positive sequence reactance (0.50-3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Fault resistance, Ph-E (1.00-9000.00) W/loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured -

with CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
Ph-E operation


Version 2.2
SEMOD153649-2 v8
Table 45. Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS
Load encroachment criteria: (1.00–3000.00) W/ ±2.0% static accuracy

Load resistance, forward and phase Conditions:
reverse (5–70) degrees Voltage range: (0.1–1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5–30) x Ir
GUID-7617A215-AE7C-47CC-B189-4914F530F717 v8
Table 46. Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS
Number of zones Max 5 with -

selectable direction

current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, (10-1000)% of IBase -

phase-to-phase and phase-to-
earth
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/ ±2.0% static accuracy

phase ±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) Ω/
phase
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) Ω/ Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
phase
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) Ω/

phase
Fault resistance, phase-to- (0.10-9000.00) Ω/

earth loop
Fault resistance, phase-to- (0.10-3000.00) Ω/

phase loop

measured with CVT’s
and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay phase- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater

phase and phase-earth
operation

x Zreach Max. =50 ms

Version 2.2
GUID-9E13C38A-3B6D-402B-98A6-6CDA20632CE7 v5
Table 47. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS

Reactive reach, positive (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

sequence ±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Resistive reach, positive (0.10–1000.00) Ω/phase
sequence
Reactive reach, zero sequence (0.50–9000.00) Ω/phase Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Resistive reach, zero sequence (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, Ph-E faults, (1.00–9000.00) Ω/loop

forward and reverse
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph faults, (0.50–3000.00) Ω/loop

forward and reverse

Version 2.2
GUID-6C2EF52A-8166-4A23-9861-38931682AA7D v8
Table 48. High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS
Number of zones 5 selectable -

directions, 2 fixed
directions
Minimum operate current, Ph- (5-6000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Ph and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance (0.01 - 3000.00) Pseudo continuous ramp:

reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop ohm/p ±2.0% of set value
Conditions:
Positive sequence resistance (0.00 - 1000.00)
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop ohm/p
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir Ramp of shots:
Zero sequence reactance reach (0.01 - 9000.00) Angle: At 0 degrees and 85 degrees ±2.0% of set value
ohm/p IEC 60255-121 points A,B,C,D,E Conditions:
IEC 60255-121 point B
Zero sequence resistive reach (0.00 - 3000.00)
ohm/p
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E (0.01 -9000.00)

and Ph-Ph ohm/l
Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 degrees -

measured with CVTs
and 0.5 < SIR < 30,
IEC 60255-121
Directional blinders Forward: -15 – 120 Pseudo continuous ramp:

degrees ±2.0 degrees, IEC 60255-121
Reverse: 165 – -60
degrees
Resistance determining the (0.01 - 5000.00) Pseudo continuous ramp: Ramp of shots:
load impedance area - forward ohm/p ±2.0% of set value ±5.0% of set value
Conditions: Conditions:
Tested at ArgLd = 30 degrees Tested at ArgLd = 30 degrees
Angle determining the load 5 - 70 degrees Pseudo continuous ramp:

impedance area ±2.0 degrees
Conditions:
Tested at RLdFw = 20 ohm/p
Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% of set value or ±35 ms whichever is greater
and Ph-Ph operation
Operate time 16 ms typically, IEC -

60255-121
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms

Version 2.2
GUID-E65CE996-C0CE-4620-8E01-A96896E62802 v1
Table 49. Power swing detection, blocking and unblocking ZMBURPSB
Reactive reach (0.10-3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Resistive reach (0.10–1000.00) W/loop
Power swing detection operate time (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±10 ms whichever is greater
Second swing reclaim operate time (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
Minimum operate current, Ph-E (5-1000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
SEMOD171935-5 v5
Table 50. Power swing logic PSLPSCH
Permitted maximum operating time (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
difference between higher and lower
zone
Delay for operation of underreach (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
zone with detected difference in
operating time
Conditional timer for sending the CS (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
at power swings
Conditional timer for tripping at (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
power swings
Timer for blocking the overreaching (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
zones trip
GUID-88E02516-1BFE-4075-BEEB-027484814697 v2
Table 51. Pole slip protection PSPPPAM
Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase ±2.0% of Ur/Ir
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1 - 20) -
SEMOD175136-2 v9
Table 52. Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM
Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase ±2.0% of Ur/(√3 ⋅ Ir)
Rotor start angle (90.0 - 130.0) degrees ±5.0 degrees
Rotor trip angle (15.0 - 90.0) degrees ±5.0 degrees
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1 - 20) -

Version 2.2
GUID-BACA37F7-E945-40BC-BF9D-A65BFC96CA91 v9
Table 53. Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ
Operate value, phase-to-phase and (10 - 90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

phase-to-neutral undervoltage, UPN<
and UPP<
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Operate value, residual voltage, 3U0> (10 - 300)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% -
Operate value, residual current, IN> (10 - 200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -
Independent time delay for residual (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
current at 0 to 2 x Iset, tIN
voltage at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset, tUN
Independent dropoff-delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater

residual voltage at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x
Uset, tOffUN
Operating mode No Filter, NoPref

Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a,
312a, 321a

Version 2.2
GUID-42119BFF-1756-431C-A5A1-0AB637213E96 v2
Table 54. Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ
Operate value, phase-to-phase and (10 - 90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

phase-to-neutral undervoltage, UPN<
and UPP<
Operate value, residual voltage, 3U0> (10 - 300)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% -
Operate value, residual current (10 - 200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

current at 0 to 2 x Iset, tIN
voltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset, tUN
Independent dropoff-delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater

residual voltage at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset,
tOffUN
Operating mode No Filter, NoPref

Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a,
312a, 321a
M16043-1 v14
Table 55. Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF
Parameter Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, detection of dead (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

line
Operate current, detection of dead (1–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

line
Time delay to operate for the switch (0.03-120.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
onto fault function
Time delay for UI detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
Delay time for activation of dead line (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
detection
Drop-off delay time of switch onto (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
fault function

Version 2.2
Wide area measurement system GUID-F0BAEBD8-E361-4D50-9737-7DF8B043D66A v5
Table 56. Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and IEC/IEEE 60255-118 (C37.118) PMUREPORT
Influencing quantity Range Accuracy
Signal frequency ± 0.1 x fr ≤ 1.0% TVE
Signal magnitude:
Voltage phasor (0.1–1.2) x Ur
Current phasor (0.5–2.0) x Ir
Phase angle ± 180°
Harmonic distortion 10% from 2nd – 50th
Interfering signal:
Magnitude 10% of fundamental signal
Minimum frequency 0.1 x fr
Maximum frequency 1000 Hz

Version 2.2
Current protection M12336-1 v14
Table 57. Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Max. = 15 ms

Max. = 40 ms
Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

Version 2.2
M12342-1 v22
Table 58. Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC
Operate current, step 1-4 (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -
Minimum operate current, step 1-4 (1-10000)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.0–65.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.0–89.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

Iset, step 1-4
Minimum operate time for inverse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
curves , step 1-4
Inverse time characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 195, table 197 and table 199
table 195, table 197 and table 199
Operate time, start non-directional Min. = 15 ms -

at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at 2 Min. = 15 ms -

x Iset to 0
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start non-directional Min. = 5 ms -

at 0 to 10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at Min. = 20 ms -

10 x Iset to 0 Max. = 35 ms
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
Operate frequency, directional 38-83 Hz -

overcurrent
Operate frequency, non-directional 10-90 Hz -

overcurrent

Version 2.2
M12340-2 v9
Table 59. Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -

Max. = 25 ms

Max. = 25 ms

Max. = 15 ms

Max. = 35 ms
Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

Version 2.2
M15223-1 v18
Table 60. Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC
Operate current, step 1-4 (1-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of -

IBase
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees

(RCA)
Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

step 1-4
Minimum operate time for inverse curves, (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
step 1-4
Inverse time characteristics, see Table 195, 16 curve types See Table 195, Table 197 and Table 199
Table 197 and Table 199
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir
Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Real part of source Z used for current (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

polarization
Imaginary part of source Z used for (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -

current polarization
*Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 15 ms -

to 2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms
*Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

to 0 Max. = 30 ms
*Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 5 ms -

*Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Min. = 20 ms -

Iset to 0 Max. = 35 ms
*Note: Operate time and reset time are only valid if harmonic blocking is turned off for a step.

Version 2.2
GUID-E83AD807-8FE0-4244-A50E-86B9AF92469E v6
Table 61. Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC
Operate current, step 1 - 4 (1-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of -

IBase
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

step 1 - 4
Minimum operate time for inverse (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
curves, step 1 - 4
Inverse time characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 195, table 197 and table 199
195, table 197 and table 199
Minimum operate current, step 1 - 4 (1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Real part of negative sequence source (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

impedance used for current
polarization
Imaginary part of negative sequence (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -

source impedance used for current
polarization
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Min. = 15 ms -

Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 5 ms -

Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Min. = 20 ms -

Transient overreach <10% at τ = 100 ms -

Version 2.2
SEMOD173350-2 v16
Table 62. Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE
Operate level for 3I0·cosj directional (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

residual overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Operate level for ·3I0·3U0 cosj directional (0.25-200.00)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S £ Sr

residual power ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
Operate level for 3I0 and j residual (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at £ Ir

overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Operate level for non-directional (1.00-400.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

Operate level for non-directional residual (1.00-200.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur

overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Residual release current for all directional (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

modes ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Residual release voltage for all directional (1.00-300.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur

modes ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Operate time for non-directional residual Min. = 40 ms

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 65 ms
Reset time for non-directional residual Min. = 40 ms

overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0
Max. = 65 ms
Operate time for directional residual Min. = 110 ms

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 160 ms
Reset time for directional residual Min. = 20 ms

overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0
Max. = 60 ms
Independent time delay for non- (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms whichever is greater
directional residual overvoltage at 0.8 x
Uset to 1.2 x Uset
Independent time delay for non- (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms whichever is greater
directional residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x
Iset
Independent time delay for directional (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 170 ms whichever is greater
residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Inverse characteristics, see table 204, 16 curve types See Table 204, Table 205 and Table 206
Table 205 and Table 206
Relay characteristic angle (RCADir) (-179 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle (ROADir) (0 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Version 2.2
M12352-1 v15
Table 63. Thermal overload protection, one time constant LCPTTR/LFPTTR
Reference current (2-400)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Reference temperature (0-300)°C, (0 - 600)°F ±1.0°C, ±2.0°F
Operate time: Time constant t = (1–1000) IEC 60255-149, ±5.0% or ±200 ms whichever is greater
minutes
 
 I , Ip
2 2 
t < σ ln  
 2 TTrip , TAmb 2 
I , T √ I ref

 ref 
EQUATION13000039 V3 EN-US (Equation 1)
TTrip = set operate temperature

TAmb = ambient temperature
Tref = temperature rise above ambient at Iref
Iref = reference load current
I = actual measured current
Ip = load current before overload occurs
Alarm temperature (0-200)°C, (0-400)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F
Operate temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F
Reset level temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F

Version 2.2
M12353-1 v15
Table 64. Breaker failure protection CCRBRF
Operate phase current (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -
Operate residual current (2-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

Phase current level for blocking of contact (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

function ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% -
Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -
Reset time for current detection 10 ms maximum * -
Time delay for retrip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Time delay for backup trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Time delay for backup trip at multi-phase start (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
at 0 to 2 x Iset
Additional time delay for a second backup trip (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
at 0 to 2 x Iset
Time delay for alarm for faulty circuit breaker (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Minimum trip pulse duration (0.010-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±5 ms whichever is greater
* Valid for product version 2.2.3 or later
M12350-1 v12
Table 65. Stub protection STBPTOC
Operating current (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 20 ms
M13279-1 v10
Table 66. Pole discordance protection CCPDSC
Operate current (0–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Independent time delay between trip (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever is greater

condition and trip signal

Version 2.2
SEMOD175152-2 v11
Table 67. Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
where
S r = 1.732 × U r × I r
Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Independent time delay to operate for (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
Step 1 and Step 2 at 2 x Sr to 0.5 x Sr and
k=0.000
SEMOD175159-2 v9
Table 68. Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Operate time, start at 0.5 x Sr to 2 x Sr and Min. =10 ms

k=0.000
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Sr to 0.5 x Sr and Min. = 35 ms

k=0.000
Max. = 55 ms
Step 1 and Step 2 at 0.5 x Sr to 2 x Sr and
k=0.000
SEMOD175200-2 v8
Table 69. Broken conductor check BRCPTOC
Minimum phase current for operation (5–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Unbalance current operation (50–90)% of maximum current ±1.0% of Ir
Independent operate time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
Independent reset time delay (0.010-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
Start time at current change from Ir to 0 Min. = 25 ms -

Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at current change from 0 to Min. = 5 ms -

Ir Max. = 20 ms

Version 2.2
GUID-7EA9731A-8D56-4689-9072-D72D9CDFD795 v8
Table 70. Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC
Start overcurrent (2.0 - 5000.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -
Operate time, start overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -

Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start overcurrent at 0 to 10 Min. = 5 ms -

x Iset Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start overcurrent at 10 x Iset to Min. = 20 ms -

0 Max. = 35 ms
Independent time delay to operate at 0 to (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
2 x Iset
Inverse time characteristics, 13 curve types See tables 195 and 197
see tables 195 and 197
Minimum operate time for inverse time (0.00 - 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
characteristics
High voltage limit, voltage dependent (30.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur

operation
Start undervoltage (2.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate time start undervoltage at 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

to 0
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time start undervoltage at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -

Uset
Max. = 30 ms
Independent time delay to operate, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
undervoltage at 2 x Uset to 0
Internal low voltage blocking (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.25% of Ur
Overcurrent: -
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically
Undervoltage: -
Critical impulse time 10ms typically at 2 x Uset to 0
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically

Version 2.2
GUID-BCCA5F2D-9FF7-4188-9B5D-DA05E8E80CC0 v1
Table 71. Average Power Transient Earth Fault Protection APPTEF
Minimum operate level for residual (5-80)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

overvoltage 3Uo> start condition "UN>"
Reset ratio for residual overvoltage 3Uo> > 75% -
Operate time for residual overvoltage Min. = 5 ms -

3Uo> Max. = 15 ms
at 0 to 2 x Uset
Minimum threshold level for residual (3-100)% of lBase ±1.5% of Ir

overcurrent start condition "IN>"
Minimum operate level for integrated (2.0-100.0)% of lBase ±1.5% of Ir

current to declare the forward direction
"IMinForward”
Minimum operate level for integrated (2.0-100.0)% of lBase ±1.5% of Ir

current to declare the reverse direction
"IMinReverse"
Minimum time delay to declare EF (0.04-2.00) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater

direction "tStart"
Minimum trip time delay "tTrip" (0.00-20.00) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
Minimum pulse length duration for trip (0.02-1.00) s ±0.2% or ±10 ms whichever is greater
and/or start outputs "tPulseMin"
Operate 3Io current level for cross country (20-1000)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
fault detection "CrossCntry_IN>" ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Time delay to activate cross country fault (0.02-1.00) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
detection "tCC" at 0 to 2 x Iset
Drop off time delay to de-activate cross Fixed 0.2 s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
country fault detection at 2 x Iset to 0
Operate 3Io current level for circulating (2-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

current detection "Circulate_IN>" ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Time delay to activate circulating current (5.0-60.0) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
detection "tCircIN" at 0 to 2 x Iset
Drop off time delay to de-activate Fixed 0.5 s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
circulating current detection at 2 x Iset to 0

Version 2.2
Voltage protection M13290-1 v15
Table 72. Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV
Operate voltage, low and high step (1.0–100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Internal blocking level, step 1 and step (1–50)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

2
Inverse time characteristics for step 1 - See table 210

and step 2, see table 210
Definite time delay, step 1 at 1.2 x Uset (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is greater
to 0
Definite time delay, step 2 at 1.2 x Uset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is greater
to 0
Minimum operate time, inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±0.5% or ±40ms whichever is greater

characteristics
Operate time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0 -

Version 2.2
M13304-1 v15
Table 73. Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV
Operate voltage, step 1 and 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Inverse time characteristics for steps 1 - See table 209

and 2, see table 209
Definite time delay, low step (step 1) at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
0 to 1.2 x Uset
Definite time delay, high step (step 2) at (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
0 to 1.2 x Uset
Minimum operate time, Inverse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

characteristics
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x -

Uset

Version 2.2
M13317-2 v15
Table 74. Residual overvoltage protection, two steps ROV2PTOV
Operate voltage, step 1 - step 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Inverse time characteristics for low - See table 211

and high step, see table 211
Definite time delay low step (step 1) at (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is greater
0 to 1.2 x Uset
Definite time delay high step (step 2) (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is greater
at 0 to 1.2 x Uset
Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is greater

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -
M13338-2 v11
Table 75. Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH
Operate value, start (100–180)% of (UBase/frated) ±0.5% of U
Operate value, alarm (50–120)% of start level ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Operate value, high level (100–200)% of (UBase/frated) ±0.5% of U
Curve type IEEE or customer defined ±5.0 % or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
(0.18 × k )
IEEE : t =
( M - 1) 2
EQUATION1319 V1 EN-US (Equation 2)
where M = (E/f)/(Ur/fr)
Minimum time delay for inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
function
Maximum time delay for inverse (0.00–9000.00) s ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
function
Alarm time delay (0.00–9000.00) ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater

Version 2.2
SEMOD166919-2 v7
Table 76. Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV
Voltage difference for alarm and trip (2.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Under voltage level (1.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Independent time delay for voltage (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
differential alarm at 0.8 x UDAlarm to 1.2 x
UDAlarm
differential trip at 0.8 x UDTrip to 1.2 x
UDTrip
differential reset at 1.2 x UDTrip to 0.8 x
UDTrip
SEMOD175210-2 v6
Table 77. Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV
Operate voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Pulse timer when disconnecting all three (0.050–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
phases
Time delay for enabling the functions after (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
restoration
Operate time delay when disconnecting all (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
three phases
Time delay to block when all three phase (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
voltages are not low
GUID-C172D5EB-51E8-4FC9-B2E7-EF976872FD7E v6
Table 78. Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC
Residual current detection (10 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio >95% at (50 - 150)% of -

IBase
Operate time, residual current detection Min. = 15 ms -

at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Independent time delay to operate, (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
residual current detection at 0 to 2 x Iset
Voltage based phase selection (30 - 100)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur
Reset ratio <115% -
Operate time, voltage-based phase Min. = 15 ms -

selection at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset
Max. = 30 ms
Independent time delay to operate, (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
voltage-based phase selection at 1.2 x Uset
to 0.8 x Uset

Version 2.2
Frequency protection M13360-1 v16
Table 79. Underfrequency protection SAPTUF
Function Range or Value Accuracy
Operate value, start function, at (35.00 - 75.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz

symmetrical three phase voltage,
StartFrequency 1)
Reset hysteresis 10.0 mHz fixed ±2.0 mHz
Operate time 1) Start time measurement Min. = 175 ms -

with sudden frequency
Max. = 195 ms
change
fr = 50 Hz
Start time measurement Min. = 70 ms
with frequency ramp
Max. = 90 ms
Start time measurement Min. = 150 ms -

Max. = 165 ms
change
fr = 60 Hz
with frequency ramp
Max. = 75 ms
Disengaging time 1) Start time measurement Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
change
fr = 50 Hz
with frequency ramp
Max. = 100 ms
Start time measurement Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
change
fr = 60 Hz
with frequency ramp
Max. = 90 ms
Operate time delay, fr = 50 Hz ±0.2% or ±200 ms

tDelay1) whichever is greater
(0.000-60.000)s
fr = 60 Hz ±0.2% or ±175 ms
Voltage dependent Settings: ±1.0% or ±120 ms

time delay UNom = (50-150)% of UBase whichever is greater
UMin = (50-150)% of UBase
Exponent = 0.0-5.0
tMax = (0.010-60.000)s
tMin = (0.010- 60.000)s
Exponent
é U - UMin ù
t=ê × ( tMax - tMin) + tMin
ëUNom - UMin úû
U = U measured
EQUATION1182 V2 EN-US
Note: The stated accuracy is valid for the voltage range 50 V – 250 V secondary.
1) The settings and test conditions are in accordance with IEC 60255-181 standard (section 6.2 – 6.7).

Version 2.2
M14964-1 v13
Table 80. Underfrequency protection SAPTOF
Function Range or Value Accuracy
Operate value, start function, (35.00 - 90.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz

at symmetrical three phase
voltage, StartFrequency 1)
Reset hysteresis 1) 10.0 mHz fixed ±2.0 mHz
Operate time 1) Start time measurement with Min. = 175 ms -

sudden frequency change
Max. = 195 ms
fr = 50 Hz
Start time measurement with Min. = 70 ms
frequency ramp
Max. = 90 ms
Start time measurement with Min. = 150 ms -

Max. = 165 ms
fr = 60 Hz
frequency ramp
Max. = 75 ms
Disengaging time 1) Start time measurement with Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
fr = 50 Hz
frequency ramp
Max. = 100 ms
Start time measurement with Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
fr = 60 Hz
frequency ramp
Max. = 90 ms
Operate time delay, fr = 50 Hz ±0.2% or ±200 ms

tDelay1) whichever is greater
(0.000-60.000)s
fr = 60 Hz ±0.2% or ±175 ms
Note: The stated accuracy is valid for the voltage range 50 V – 250 V secondary.
1) The settings and test conditions are in accordance with IEC 60255-181 standard (section 6.2 – 6.7).
M14976-1 v10
Table 81. Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC
Operate value, start function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s ±10.0 mHz/s
Operate value, restore enable frequency (45.00-65.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
Definite restore time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is greater
Definite time delay for frequency gradient (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±120 ms whichever is greater
trip
Definite reset time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is greater

Version 2.2
Multipurpose protection M13095-2 v11
Table 82. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC
Measuring current input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -

NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh,
MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-
phase2, phase2-phase3, phase3-
phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph,
UnbalancePh-Ph
Measuring voltage input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -

NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh,
MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-
phase2, phase2-phase3, phase3-
phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph,
UnbalancePh-Ph
Start overcurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Start undercurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Independent time delay, overcurrent at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
0 to 2 x Iset, step 1 - 2
Independent time delay, undercurrent (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
at 2 x Iset to 0, step 1 - 2
Overcurrent (non-directional):
Start time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 20 ms

Max. = 35 ms
Undercurrent:
Start time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Overcurrent:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 195, 197 and table 199
195, 197 and table 199
Overcurrent:
Minimum operate time for inverse (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
curves, step 1 - 2
Voltage level where voltage memory (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

takes over
Start overvoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur


Version 2.2
Table 82. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC, continued

Start undervoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Independent time delay, overvoltage at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset, step 1 - 2
Independent time delay, undervoltage (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset, step 1 - 2
Overvoltage:
Start time at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Undervoltage:
Start time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Overvoltage:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 4 curve types See table 209
209
Undervoltage:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 3 curve types See table 210
210
High and low voltage limit, voltage (1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
dependent operation, step 1 - 2 ±1.0% of U at U > Ur
Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and -

reverse
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to +180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -
Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% -
Reset ratio, overvoltage > 95% -
Operate frequency 10-90 Hz -
Overcurrent:
Undercurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 x Iset to 0 -
Overvoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x -

Uset

Version 2.2
Table 82. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC, continued

Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x -

Uset

Version 2.2
Secondary system supervision M12358-1 v10
Table 83. Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC
Operate current (10-200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±10.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, Operate current >90%
Block current (20-500)% of IBase ±5.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio, Block current >90% at (50-500)% of

IBase
M16069-1 v12
Table 84. Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC
Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate current, zero sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate voltage, negative sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate current, negative sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate voltage change level (1-100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Ur
Operate current change level (1–100)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir
Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate phase current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate phase dead line current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Version 2.2
GUID-E2EA8017-BB4B-48B0-BEDA-E71FEE353774 v5
Table 85. Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC
Operate value, block of main fuse failure (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio <110%
Operate time, block of main fuse failure at 1 x Ur Min. = 5 ms –

to 0
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, block of main fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms –
Max. = 30 ms
Operate value, alarm for pilot fuse failure (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio <110% –
Operate time, alarm for pilot fuse failure at 1 x Ur Min. = 5 ms –

to 0
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, alarm for pilot fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Min. = 15 ms –

Ur
Max. = 30 ms
GUID-DAECF9F5-1D0B-43FC-AD29-8F96E05DD0DA v4
Table 86. Voltage based delta supervision DELVSPVC
Minimum Voltage (5.0 - 50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
DelU> (2.0 - 500.0)% of UBase Instantaneous 1 cycle & Instantaneous 2 cycle mode:
±20% of Ur at U ≤ Ur±20% of U at U > Ur
RMS & DFT Mag mode:±10% of Ur at U ≤ Ur±10% of U at
U > Ur
DelUAng> (2.0 - 40.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Operate time for changeat Ur to (Ur + 2 x DelU>)at Instantaneous 1 cycle & Instantaneous 2 cycle mode -
Ur to (Ur + 5 x DelU>) <20msRMS & DFT Mag mode - <30ms
Operate time for jump from Zero degrees to Vector shift mode - <60ms
'AngStVal' + 2 degrees
GUID-ED3FE722-1F29-4340-94E9-6C907C4474F2 v3
Table 87. Current based delta supervision DELISPVC
Minimum current (5.0 - 50.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir
DelI> (10.0 - 500.0)% of IBase Instantaneous 1 cycle & Instantaneous 2 cycle mode:
±20% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±20% of I at I > Ir
RMS & DFT Mag mode:
±10% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±10% of I at I > Ir
Second harmonic blocking (5.0 - 100.0)% of ±2.0% of Ir

fundamental
Third harmonic restraining (5.0 - 100.0)% of ±2.0% of Ir

fundamental
Operate time for changeat Ir to (Ir + 2 x DelI>)at Ir Instantaneous 1 cycle & Instantaneous 2 cycle mode -
to (Ir + 5 x DelI>) <20ms
RMS & DFT Mag mode - <30ms

Version 2.2
Control M12359-1 v15
Table 88. Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check SESRSYN
Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -
Voltage high limit for synchronizing and synchrocheck (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -
Frequency difference limit between bus and line for synchrocheck (0.003-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz
Phase angle difference limit between bus and line for synchrocheck (5.0-90.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Voltage difference limit between bus and line for synchronizing and (0.02-0.5) p.u ±0.5% of Ur
synchrocheck
Time delay output for synchrocheck when angle difference between (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
bus and line jumps from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to “PhaseDiff” - 2 greater
degrees
Frequency difference minimum limit for synchronizing (0.003-0.250) Hz ±2.5 mHz
Frequency difference maximum limit for synchronizing (0.050-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz
Maximum closing angle between bus and line for synchronizing (15-30) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Breaker closing pulse duration (0.050-1.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is

greater
tMaxSynch, which resets synchronizing function if no close has been (0.000-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
made before set time greater
Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

greater
Voltage high limit for energizing check (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -
Voltage low limit for energizing check (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio, voltage low limit < 105% -
Maximum voltage for energizing (50.0-180.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Time delay for energizing check when voltage jumps from 0 to 90% (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is
of Urated greater
Operate time for synchrocheck function when angle difference Min. = 15 ms –

between bus and line jumps from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to Max. = 30 ms
“PhaseDiff” - 2 degrees
Operate time for energizing function when voltage jumps from 0 to Min. = 70 ms –
90% of Urated Max. = 90 ms

Version 2.2
M12379-1 v13
Table 89. Autorecloser SMBRREC
Dead time:
shot 1 “t1 1Ph” (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
shot 1 “t1 2Ph” whichever is greater
shot 1 “t1 3Ph “
shot 1 “t1 3PhHS”
Dead time: (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms

shot 2 “t2 3Ph” whichever is greater
shot 3 “t3 3Ph”
shot 4 “t4 3Ph”
shot 5 “t5 3Ph”
Extend three-phase dead time duration “tExtended t1” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
Minimum time that circuit breaker must be closed before new sequence is allowed (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
“tCBClosedMin” whichever is greater
Wait time for the slave to close when WAIT input has reset “tSlaveDeadTime” (0.100-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
Maximum allowed start pulse duration “tLongStartInh” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms

Circuit breaker closing pulse duration “tPulse” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms

Reclaim time ”tReclaim” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms

Maximum wait time for release from master “tWaitForMaster” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
Reset time for reclosing inhibit “tInhibit” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms

Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot “tAutoContWait” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
Maximum wait time for fulfilled synchrocheck conditions “tSync” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
Delay time before indicating successful reclosing “tSuccessful” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±50 ms
Maximum wait time for circuit breaker closing before indicating unsuccessful (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
“tUnsucCl” whichever is greater

Version 2.2
Scheme communication M16038-1 v14
Table 90. Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking scheme signal transmit ZCPSCH
Scheme type Off -

Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking
Operate voltage, Delta U (0–100)% of UBase ±5.0% of ΔU
Operate current, Delta I (0–200)% of IBase ±5.0% of ΔI
Operate zero sequence voltage, (0–100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Δ3U0

Delta 3U0
Operate zero sequence current, (0–200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Δ3I0

Delta 3I0
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

communication scheme
Minimum duration of a carrier (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

send signal
Security timer for loss of guard (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
signal detection
Operation mode of unblocking Off -

logic NoRestart
Restart
SEMOD166936-2 v7
Table 91. Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection ZC1PPSCH
Scheme type Intertrip -

Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

communication scheme
Minimum duration of a carrier (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

send signal

Version 2.2
M16039-1 v16
Table 92. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection ZCRWPSCH
Detection level phase-to- (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

neutral voltage
Detection level phase-to-phase (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

voltage
Operate time for current (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

reversal logic
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Coordination time for weak- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

end infeed logic
SEMOD166938-2 v6
Table 93. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication ZC1WPSCH
Detection level phase to (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

neutral voltage
Detection level phase to phase (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

voltage
Reset ratio <105% at (20-90)% of UBase -

reversal
Coordination time for weak- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

end infeed logic
M16049-1 v10
Table 94. Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH
Scheme type Permissive Underreaching -

Permissive Overreaching
Blocking
Communication scheme (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater

coordination time
GUID-CC9A02C2-AAE8-4B8C-A091-D4ED584A2EA7 v1
Table 95. Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH
Operate current, LoadCurr (1–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Operate current, MinCurr (1–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Delay time on pick-up for current release (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
Delay time on drop-off for current release (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
Delay time on pick-up for MinCurr value (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

Version 2.2
M16051-2 v11
Table 96. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH
Operate mode of WEI logic Off -

Echo
Echo & Trip
Operate voltage 3U0 for WEI (5-70)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

trip

reversal logic
Coordination time for weak- (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

end infeed logic

Version 2.2
Direct transfer trip

GUID-B5714FAE-A87D-4C2D-A167-6CB3522CE1D5 v5
Table 97. Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC
Operate value, low active power (2.0-100.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr
Reset ratio, low active power <105% -
Operate value, low power factor 0.00-1.00 ±0.02
low active power at 1.2 x Pset to 0.8 x
Pset
low power factor at 1.2 x PFset to 0.8 x
PFset
Critical impulse time, low active power 10 ms typically at 1.2 x Pset to 0.8 -
x Pset
Impulse margin time, low active power 10 ms typically -
GUID-D9EADF1B-5FC7-4FDB-BF38-95BDBC4D7C3D v5
Table 98. Compensated over- and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC
Operate value, undervoltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0,5% of Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.00–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Critical impulse time, undervoltage 10 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x -

Uset
Impulse margin time, undervoltage 15 ms typically -
Operate value, overvoltage (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U≤Ur

± 0.5% of U at U>Ur
Critical impulse time, overvoltage 10 ms typically at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x -

Uset
Impulse margin time, overvoltage 15 ms typically -
Independent time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater

undervoltage functionality at 1.2 x
Uset to 0.8 x Uset
Independent time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater

overvoltage functionality at 0.8 x
Uset to 1.2 x Uset
GUID-4BF21D95-4517-424E-BC23-6156EA0E253C v4
Table 99. Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC
Operate value, overcurrent (5-100)% of IBase ±2.0% of Ir
Hold time for operate signal at 0 to (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
2 x Iset

Version 2.2
GUID-C99E063D-B377-40D5-8481-9F46D4166AED v3
Table 100. Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC
Operation mode 1 Out Of 2 -

2 Out Of 2
Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
GUID-122A206E-27D2-4D15-AD5A-86B68F1ED559 v6
Table 101. Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV
Operate value, negative sequence (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U≤Ur

overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U>Ur
Reset ratio, negative sequence >95% at (10–200)% of UBase -

overvoltage

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time, negative 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

sequence overvoltage
Impulse margin time, negative 15 ms typically -

sequence overvoltage
Independent time delay to operate at (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater

0 to 1.2 x Uset
The stated accuracy is valid for voltage levels up to 300V secondary.
GUID-7A8E7F49-F079-42A0-8685-20288FAD5982 v5
Table 102. Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV
Operate value, zero sequence (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Reset ratio, zero sequence overvoltage >95% at (10–200)% of UBase -

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time, zero sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

overvoltage
Impulse margin time, zero sequence 15 ms typically -

overvoltage
Independent time delay to operate at (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater

0 to 1.2 x Uset

Version 2.2
GUID-0E964441-43DE-43B6-B454-485FBBF66B5C v5
Table 103. Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC
Operate value, negative sequence (3 - 2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio, negative sequence >95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

overcurrent

Max. = 25 ms

Max. = 25 ms

Max. = 20 ms

Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time, negative sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

overcurrent 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
Impulse margin time, negative sequence 15 ms typically -

overcurrent
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms, whichever is greater
Transient overreach, start function <10% at τ = 100 ms -
GUID-9F739808-04CA-4988-ABBC-1A444297FDB5 v5
Table 104. Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC
Operate value, zero sequence (3-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I≤Ir

overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I>Ir
Reset ratio, zero sequence overcurrent >95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 20 ms

Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time, zero sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

overcurrent 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
Impulse margin time, zero sequence 15 ms typically -

overcurrent
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

Version 2.2
GUID-C4ACE306-2A54-483D-B247-A479D48CBF5F v5
Table 105. Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC
Operate value, overcurrent (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% at (50-2500)% of -

IBase

Max. = 25 ms

Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time, overcurrent 3 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

1 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
Impulse margin time, overcurrent 10 ms typically -
Independent time delay to operate at 0 to (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

2 x Iset
GUID-CE2C6F0A-DF49-4AAF-80F0-9CDCBB08E755 v5
Table 106. Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC
Operate value, undercurrent (1.00-100.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% at (50.00-100.00)% of -

IBase
Start time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time, undercurrent 10 ms typically at 2 x Iset to 0 -
Impulse margin time, undercurrent 10 ms typically -
Independent time delay to operate at 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
to 0

Version 2.2
Logic M12380-1 v15
Table 107. Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC
Trip action, Program 3 phase, 1ph/2ph, -

1ph/2ph/3ph
Minimum trip pulse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

length ,tTripMin
3-pole trip delay, tWaitForPHS (0.020-0.500) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Evolving fault delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

, tEvolvingFault
GUID-1E1A829D-1F26-433A-8813-1F5A6F225418 v1
Table 108. Number of SMAGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SMAGAPC 12 - -
Table 109. Number of STARTCOMB instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
STARTCOMB 32 - -
GUID-3AB1EE95-51BF-4CC4-99BD-F4ECDAACB75A v3
Table 110. Number of TMAGAPC instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TMAGAPC 6 6 -
GUID-A05AF26F-DC98-4E62-B96B-E75D19F20767 v2
Table 111. Number of ALMCALH instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ALMCALH - - 5
GUID-70B7357D-F467-4CF5-9F73-641A82D334F5 v2
Table 112. Number of WRNCALH instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
WRNCALH - - 5

Version 2.2
GUID-EAA43288-01A5-49CF-BF5B-9ABF6DC27D85 v2
Table 113. Number of INDCALH instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCALH - 5 -
GUID-D1179280-1D99-4A66-91AC-B7343DBA9F23 v3
Table 114. Number of AND instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 60 60 160
GUID-45DF373F-DC39-4E1B-B45B-6B454E8E0E50 v3
Table 115. Number of GATE instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
GATE 10 10 20
GUID-0EC4192A-EF03-47C0-AEC1-09B68B411A98 v3
Table 116. Number of INV instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INV 90 90 240
GUID-B2E6F510-8766-4381-9618-CE02ED71FFB6 v2
Table 117. Number of LLD instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
LLD 10 10 20
GUID-35A795D7-A6BD-4669-A023-43C497DBFB01 v4
Table 118. Number of OR instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
OR 100 60 160
GUID-E05E5FB1-23E7-4816-84F2-1FBFFDFF2B43 v2
Table 119. Number of PULSETIMER instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

Version 2.2
GUID-BE6FD540-E96E-4F15-B2A2-12FFAE6C51DB v2
Table 120. Number of RSMEMORY instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORY 10 10 20
GUID-7A0F4327-CA83-4FB0-AB28-7C5F17AE6354 v2
Table 121. Number of SRMEMORY instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORY 10 10 20
GUID-C6C98FE0-F559-45EE-B853-464516775417 v3
Table 122. Number of TIMERSET instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSET 15 15 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
GUID-0B07F78C-10BD-4070-AFF0-6EE36454AA03 v2
Table 123. Number of XOR instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XOR 10 10 20
GUID-23D4121A-4C9A-4072-BBE3-6DB076EDAB79 v1
Table 124. Number of ANDQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ANDQT - 20 100
GUID-27DF23C0-A0B2-4BB0-80B5-FC7B7F7FE448 v1
Table 125. Number of INDCOMBSPQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCOMBSPQT - 10 10
GUID-C1E61AE5-22CF-4198-97CF-8C8043EE96D2 v1
Table 126. Number of INDEXTSPQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDEXTSPQT - 10 10

Version 2.2
GUID-77FEBE9B-0882-4E85-8B1A-7671807BFC02 v2
Table 127. Number of INVALIDQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INVALIDQT 10 6 6
GUID-F25B94C6-9CC9-48A0-A7A3-47627D2B56E2 v1
Table 128. Number of INVERTERQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INVERTERQT - 20 100
GUID-88B27B3C-26D2-47AF-9878-CC19018171B1 v1
Table 129. Number of ORQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ORQT - 20 100
GUID-61263951-53A8-4113-82B5-3DB3BF0D9449 v1
Table 130. Number of PULSETIMERQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMERQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
GUID-94C803B4-6C5A-4072-AB5C-20DDE98C9A70 v1
Table 131. Number of RSMEMORYQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORYQT - 10 30
GUID-341562FB-6149-495B-8A63-200DF16A5590 v1
Table 132. Number of SRMEMORYQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORYQT - 10 30
GUID-B6231B97-05ED-40E8-B735-1E1A50FDB85F v1
Table 133. Number of TIMERSETQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSETQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

Version 2.2
GUID-1C381E02-6B9E-44DC-828F-8B3EA7EDAA54 v1
Table 134. Number of XORQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XORQT - 10 30
GUID-19810098-1820-4765-8F0B-7D585FFC0C78 v8
Table 135. Number of instances in the extension logic package
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SLGAPC 10 10 54
VSGAPC 10 10 100
AND 80 40 100
OR 80 40 100
PULSETIMER 20 20 49
GATE — — 49
TIMERSET 34 30 49
XOR 10 10 69
LLD — — 49
SRMEMORY 10 10 110
INV 80 40 100
RSMEMORY 10 10 20
GUID-65A2876A-F779-41C4-ACD7-7662D1E7F1F2 v4
Table 136. Number of B16I instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
B16I 6 4 8
GUID-3820F464-D296-4CAD-8491-F3F997359D79 v2
Table 137. Number of BTIGAPC instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
BTIGAPC 4 4 8
GUID-B45901F4-B163-4696-8220-7F8CAC84D793 v3
Table 138. Number of IB16 instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
IB16 12 4 8

Version 2.2
GUID-A339BBA3-8FD0-429D-BB49-809EAC4D53B0 v2
Table 139. Number of ITBGAPC instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ITBGAPC 4 4 8
GUID-B258726E-1129-47C9-94F9-BE634A2085FA v4
Table 140. Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC
Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy
Elapsed time integration 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is

greater
8 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is

greater
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is

greater
Table 141. Number of TEIGAPC instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TEIGAPC 4 4 4
GUID-CEA332FF-838D-42B7-AEFC-C1E87809825E v4
Table 142. Number of INTCOMP instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INTCOMP 10 10 10
GUID-3FDD7677-1D86-42AD-A545-B66081C49B47 v4
Table 143. Number of REALCOMP instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
REALCOMP 10 10 10

Version 2.2
Monitoring M12386-1 v16
Table 144. Power system measurement CVMMXN
Frequency (0.95-1.05) x fr ±2.0 mHz
Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.3% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Current (0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.8% of I at 0.1 x Ir < I < 0.2 x Ir

± 0.5% of I at 0.2 x Ir < I < 0.5 x Ir
±0.2% of I at 0.5 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir
Active power, P (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr

(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of P

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ > 0.7
Reactive power, Q (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr

(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of Q

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ < 0.7
Apparent power, S (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr

(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S >0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of S

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
Power factor, cos (φ) (10 to 300) V <0.02

(0.1-4.0) x Ir
(100 to 220) V <0.01

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
GUID-5E04B3F9-E1B7-4974-9C0B-DE9CD4A2408F v6
Table 145. Current measurement CMMXU
Current at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Phase angle at symmetrical (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

load ±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤ 4.0 × Ir
GUID-374C2AF0-D647-4159-8D3A-71190FE3CFE0 v5
Table 146. Voltage measurement phase-phase VMMXU

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V

Version 2.2
GUID-ED634B6D-9918-464F-B6A4-51B78129B819 v6
Table 147. Voltage measurement phase-earth VNMMXU

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

GUID-9B8A7FA5-9C98-4CBD-A162-7112869CF030 v5
Table 148. Current sequence measurement CMSQI
Current positive sequence, I1 (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Current zero sequence, 3I0 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Current negative sequence, I2 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Phase angle (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤ 4.0 × Ir
GUID-47094054-A828-459B-BE6A-D7FA1B317DA7 v6
Table 149. Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI
Voltage positive sequence, U1 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage zero sequence, 3U0 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage negative sequence, U2 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

M16080-1 v5
Table 150. Supervision of mA input signals
mA measuring function ±5, ±10, ±20 mA ±0.1 % of set value ±0.005 mA

0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20 mA
Max current of transducer (-20.00 to +20.00) mA

to input
Min current of transducer to (-20.00 to +20.00) mA

input
Alarm level for input (-20.00 to +20.00) mA
Warning level for input (-20.00 to +20.00) mA
Alarm hysteresis for input (0.0-20.0) mA

Version 2.2
M12760-1 v12
Table 151. Disturbance report DRPRDRE
Pre-fault time (0.05–9.90) s -
Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–10.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 200, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 190
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -

derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 352 -
Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value recorder per recording 30 -
Maximum number of indications in a disturbance report 352 -
Maximum number of events in the Event recording per recording 150 -
Maximum number of events in the Event list 5000, first in - first out -
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number 340 seconds (100 recordings) -
of channels, typical value) at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -

1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -
GUID-F034B396-6600-49EF-B0A5-8ED96766A6A0 v9
Table 152. Insulation supervision for gas medium function SSIMG
Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value or 0.2 whichever is greater
Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value or 0.2 whichever is greater
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value or 1 whichever is greater
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value or 1 whichever is greater
Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Reset time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Reset time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for temperature lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Version 2.2
GUID-83B0F607-D898-403A-94FD-7FE8D45C73FF v9
Table 153. Insulation supervision for liquid medium function SSIML
Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value or 0.2 whichever is greater
Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value or 0.2 whichever is greater
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value or 1 whichever is greater
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value or 1 whichever is greater
Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Reset time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for temperature lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
GUID-B6799420-D726-460E-B02F-C7D4F1937432 v9
Table 154. Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR
Alarm level for open and close travel time (0 – 200) ms ±3 ms
Alarm level for number of operations (0 – 9999) -
Independent time delay for spring (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
charging time alarm
Independent time delay for gas pressure (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
alarm
Independent time delay for gas pressure (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
lockout
CB Contact Travel Time, opening and ±3 ms

closing
Remaining Life of CB ±2 operations
Accumulated Energy ±1.0% or ±0.5 whichever is greater
M14987-1 v7
Table 155. Fault locator LMBRFLO
Function Value or range Accuracy
Reactive and resistive reach (0.001-1500.000) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Phase selection According to input signals -
Maximum number of 200 -

disturbance reports

Version 2.2
M12700-1 v5
Table 156. Event list
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 5000
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing
M13765-1 v6
Table 157. Indications
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications 352

presented for single disturbance
Maximum number of recorded 200

disturbances
M12702-1 v5
Table 158. Event recorder
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in 150

disturbance report
Maximum number of disturbance 200

reports
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing
M13747-1 v6
Table 159. Trip value recorder
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 30
Maximum number of disturbance 200

reports
M12384-1 v8
Table 160. Disturbance recorder
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 40
Maximum number of binary inputs 352
Maximum number of disturbance reports 200
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz
number of channels, typical value) 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz

Version 2.2
GUID-C43B8654-60FE-4E20-8328-754C238F4AD0 v3
Relion® 670 series can store up to

10240 security events.
Table 161. Event counter with limit supervision L4UFCNT
Counter value 0-65535 -

Version 2.2
Table 161. Event counter with limit supervision L4UFCNT , continued

Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -
GUID-F5E124E3-0B85-41AC-9830-A2362FD289F2 v1
Table 162. Running hour-meter TEILGAPC
Time limit for alarm supervision, tAlarm (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
Time limit for warning supervision, (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
tWarning
Time limit for overflow supervision Fixed to 99999.9 hours ±0.1%
GUID-3763D0D6-AD44-4C9B-91E4-050C0B63C7EA v1
Table 163. Through fault monitoring PTRSTHR
Operate current (50-1000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50-1000)% of IBase –
GUID-09EC65AC-C60B-4256-A601-FE2CC90D26EC v2
Table 164. Current harmonic monitoring CHMMHAI (50/60 Hz)
Fundamental Harmonic
Frequency (0.95 - 1.05) X fr 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ± 2 mHz
True RMS (0.2 to 2) X Ir None ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

(0.2 to 2) X Ir 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Fundamental (0.2 to 2) X Ir None ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

(0.2 to 2) X Ir 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Crest Factor (0.2 to 2) X Ir None ± 2%
Harmonic (0.2 to 2) X Ir 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ±2.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Amplitude ±5.0% of IH at I > Ir
Total Demand (0.2 to 2) X Ir 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ±5.0% at I ≤ Ir
Distortion (TDD) ±5.0% of ITDD at I > Ir
Total Harmonic (0.2 to 2) X Ir 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ± 5%

Distortion (ITHD)

Version 2.2
GUID-2068BBA0-9026-48D0-9DEB-301BCB3C600C v2
Table 165. Voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAI (50/60 Hz)
Fundamental Harmonic
Frequency (0.95 - 1.05) X fr 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X UF ± 50 mHz
True RMS (10 to 150) V None ± 0.5% of U
(10 to 150) V 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X UF ± 2% of U
Fundamental (10 to 150) V None ± 0.5% of UF
(10 to 150) V 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X UF ± 0.5% of UF
Crest Factor (10 to 150) V None ± 2%
Harmonic (10 to 150) V 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X UF ± 4% of UH

Amplitude
Total Harmonic (10 to 150) V 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X UF ± 4%
Distortion
(VTHD)
Note:
UF - Applied Voltage Fundamental
UH - Applied Voltage Harmonic (of respective harmonics)
U - Actual Voltage = RMS (UF and UH)

Version 2.2
Metering M13404-2 v5
Table 166. Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT
Function Setting range Accuracy
Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -
Cycle time for report of (1–3600) s -

counter value
SEMOD153707-2 v5
Table 167. Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR
Energy metering kWh Export/Import, kvarh Export/Import Input from MMXU. No extra error at steady load

Version 2.2
Station communication M15031-1 v9
Table 168. Communication protocols
Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 60870–5–103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–115200 Bd
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s
Protocol LON
Communication speed for the IEDs 1.25 Mbit/s
Protocol SPA
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–38400 Bd
GUID-E8B5405C-241C-4DC2-8AB1-3FA77343A4DE v2
Table 169. IEC 61850-9-2 communication protocol
Function Value
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
M11927-1 v2
Table 170. LON communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s
M11901-1 v2
Table 171. SPA communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd
Slave number 1 to 899
M11921-1 v4
Table 172. IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Function Value
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd

Version 2.2
M12589-1 v5
Table 173. SLM – LON port
Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST

Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *)

Plastic fiber: 7 dB (10m/35 ft typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation
SEMOD117441-2 v6
Table 174. SLM – SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port
Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST

Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *)

Plastic fiber: 7 dB (25m/80 ft typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fiber: 1 mm
SEMOD158710-2 v2
Table 175. Galvanic RS485 communication module
Communication speed 2400–19200 bauds
External connectors RS-485 6-pole connector

Soft ground 2-pole connector
SEMOD55310-2 v14
Table 176. SFP - Optical ethernet port
Quantity Rated value
Number of channels Up to 6 single or 3 redundant or a combination of single and redundant links for communication using any
protocol
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm, 50/125 mm multimode

OM1, OM2, OM3, OM4
Length 2km
Wave length 1310 nm, Class 1 laser safety
Optical connector Type LC
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

Version 2.2
Table 177. SFP - Galvanic RJ45
Number of channels Up to 6 single or 3 redundant or a combination of single and redundant links for
communication using any protocol
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX
Type of cable Cat5e FTP
Connector Type RJ45
Communication Speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s
GUID-8651FF22-C007-4D53-B7E3-686A30F37CB6 v7
Table 178. Ethernet redundancy protocols, IEC 62439-3
Function Value
Protocol IEC 62439-3 Ed.1 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP-0)
Communication speed 100Base-FX
Protocol IEC 62439-3 Ed.2 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP-1)
Protocol IEC 62439-3 Ed.2 High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR)
Connectors Optical, type LC or Galvanic, type RJ45

Version 2.2
Remote communication M12756-1 v13
Table 179. Line data communication module
Characteristic Range or value
Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Type of fiber Multi-mode fiber Single-mode fiber Single-mode fiber

glass 62.5/125 µm glass 9/125 µm glass 9/125 µm
Multi-mode fiber
glass 50/125 µm
Peak Emission Wave length

Nominal 820 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm
Maximum 865 nm 1330 nm 1580 nm
Minimum 792 nm 1290 nm 1520 nm
Optical budget 18.8 dB (typical 26.8 dB (typical 28.7 dB (typical

Multi-mode fiber glass 62.5/125 mm distance about 3 distance 80 km/50 distance 110 km/68
km/2 mile *) mile *) mile *)
Multi-mode fiber glass 50/125 mm 11.5 dB (typical

distance about 2
km/1 mile *)
Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC Type FC/PC
Protocol C37.94 C37.94 C37.94

implementation **) implementation **)
Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous
Transmission rate / Data rate 2 Mbit/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mbit/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mbit/s / 64 kbit/s
Clock source Internal or derived Internal or derived Internal or derived

from received from received from received signal
signal signal

**) C37.94 originally defined just for multi-mode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94
GUID-83EC40D0-ABCF-4292-B3DF-155C3A556B76 v4
Table 180. Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)
Connector, X.21 Micro D-sub, 15-pole male, 1.27 mm (0.050") pitch
Connector, ground selection 2 pole screw terminal
Standard CCITT X21
Communication speed 64 kbit/s
Insulation 1 kV
Maximum cable length 10 m

Version 2.2
Hardware
IED
M11778-1 v7 SEMOD53385-1 v1
Table 181. Case
Material Steel sheet
Front plate Stainless steel with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)
M12327-1 v5
Table 182. Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529
Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)
Sides, top and bottom IP40
Rear side IP20 with screw compression type

IP10 with ring lug terminals
M11777-1 v7
Table 183. Weight
Case size Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19” £ 7.5 kg/16 lb
6U, 3/4 x 19” £ 15 kg/33 lb
6U, 1/1 x 19” £ 15 kg/33 lb
Electrical safety
GUID-1CF5B10A-CF8B-407D-8D87-F4B48B43C2B2 v2 GUID-2825B541-DD31-4DAF-B5B3-97555F81A1C2 v1
Table 184. Electrical safety according to IEC 60255-27
Equipment class I (protective earthed)
Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 2 (normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by
condensation is to be expected)
Connection system
SEMOD53376-2 v6 SEMOD53371-1 v1
Table 185. CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)

2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
M12583-1 v8
Table 186. Auxiliary power supply and binary I/O connectors
Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)

2 × 1 mm 2 (2 x AWG18)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 300 V AC 3 mm2 (AWG14)

Version 2.2
GUID-96676D5D-0835-44DA-BC22-058FD18BDF34 v3
Because of limitations of space, when

ring lug terminal is ordered for Binary
I/O connections, one blank slot is
necessary between two adjacent I/O
modules. Please refer to the ordering
particulars for details.
Table 187. NUM: Communication ports
NUM 4 Ethernet ports

1 Basic, 3 Optional
Ethernet connection type SFP Optical LC or Galvanic RJ45
Carrier modules supported OEM, LDCM
GUID-4876834C-CABB-400B-B84B-215F65D8AF92 v3
Table 188. OEM: Number of Ethernet ports
OEM 2 Ethernet Ports
Ethernet connection type SFP Optical LC or Galvanic RJ45

Version 2.2
Basic IED functions M11963-1 v5
Table 189. Self supervision with internal event list
Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out
M12331-1 v9
Table 190. Time synchronization, time tagging
Function Value
Time tagging accuracy of the synchrophasor data ± 1 µs
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), events and sampled ± 1.0 ms typically
measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement values ± 1.0 ms typically
GUID-8AEB81D0-1731-46DF-A206-D2E758823575 v2
Table 191. Time synchronization PTP: IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Supported types of clock Boundary Clock (BC), Ordinary Clock (OC), Transparent Clock (TC)
Accuracy According to standard IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Number of nodes According to standard IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Ports supported All rear Ethernet ports
SEMOD55660-2 v3
Table 192. GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
Receiver – ±1µs relative UTC
Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new <30 minutes –

position or after power loss longer than 1 month
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss <15 minutes –

longer than 48 hours
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss <5 minutes –

shorter than 48 hours
SEMOD55693-2 v5
Table 193. GPS – Antenna and cable
Function Value
Max antenna cable attenuation 26 db @ 1.6 GHz
Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm
Lightning protection Must be provided externally
Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver end

TNC in antenna end
Accuracy +/-1μs

Version 2.2
SEMOD141136-2 v10
Table 194. IRIG-B
Number of channels IRIG-B 1
Number of optical channels 1
Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC
Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated
– low level 1-3 Vpp
– high level 3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x
Accuracy +/-10μs for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100μs for IRIG-B 12x
Input impedance 100 k ohm
Optical connector:
Optical connector IRIG-B Type ST
Type of fiber 62.5/125 μm multimode fiber
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x
Accuracy +/- 1μs

Version 2.2
Inverse characteristic M12388-1 v23
Table 195. ANSI Inverse time characteristics
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±2.0% or ±40 ms
æ A ö whichever is greater
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US
Reset characteristic:
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
I = Imeasured/Iset
ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6
Table 196. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection

±5.0% or ±40 ms
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
I = Imeasured/Iset

Version 2.2
Table 197. IEC Inverse time characteristics
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±40 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷
è ø TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN-US CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
Reset characteristic: PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset
The parameter setting Characteristn =

Reserved (where, n = 1 - 4) shall not be
used, since this parameter setting is
for future use and not implemented
yet.

Version 2.2
Table 198. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection

or ±40 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
ç (I - C ) ÷
è ø TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 199. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics
RI type inverse characteristic 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse

characteristic
æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
I = Imeasured/Iset

Version 2.2
Table 200. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection

1 greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset

characteristic
æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
GUID-771E5218-2913-4BB0-B1EE-2CA1E912AEAA v1
Table 201. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential Protection
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 , ±

5.0% or ± 40 ms
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
I = Imeasured/Iset

Version 2.2
Table 202. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, ± 5.0%

or ± 40 ms whichever
æ A ö is greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
ç (I - C ) ÷
è ø TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset
The parameter setting Characterist1

and 4/Reserved shall not be used, since
this parameter setting is for future use
and not implemented yet.
Table 203. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, ± 5.0%

or ± 40 ms whichever
1 is greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

characteristic
æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
I = Imeasured/Iset

Version 2.2
GUID-19F8E187-4ED0-48C3-92F6-0D9EAA2B39BB v4
Table 204. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±5.0% or ±160 ms
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
I = Imeasured/Iset

Version 2.2
Table 205. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±160 ms whichever
æ A ö is greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01

B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
ç (I - C ) ÷
è ø TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 206. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±160 ms whichever
1 is greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset

characteristic
æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
I = Imeasured/Iset

Version 2.2
GUID-2AE8C92E-5DA8-487F-927D-8E553EE29240 v2
Table 207. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 , ±

5.0% or ±40 ms
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 208. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection

æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset

Version 2.2
SEMOD116978-2 v10
Table 209. Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 ms

k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 Un  
IECEQUATION2423 V2 EN-US
Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U> ø
IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN-US
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
k×A B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
t = +D C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
P
æB × U - U > ö D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001
ç -C÷
è U > ø P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001

Version 2.2
Table 210. Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 ms

k
t =
æ U < -U
ö
ç ÷
è U< ø
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
k × 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
æ 32 × U < -U - 0.5 ö
ç ÷
è U < ø
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
é ù B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
ê k×A
ú C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
t =ê ú+D D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001
ê æ U < -U ö
P
ú P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
êçB × -C÷ ú
ëè U < ø û
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Version 2.2
Table 211. Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps ±5.0% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

of 0.01
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
2.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
3.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
k×A A = (0.005-200.000) in
t = +D steps of 0.001
P
æB × U - U > ö B = (0.50-100.00) in
ç -C÷
è U > ø steps of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

Version 2.2
27. Ordering for customized IED GUID-79B6B8D2-5EE1-4456-A767-5820B9FA61D7 v13
Table 212. General guidelines
Guidelines
Carefully read and follow the set of rules to ensure problem-free order management.
Please refer to the available functions table for included application functions.
PCM600 can be used to make changes and/or additions to the delivered factory configuration of the pre-configured.
Table 213. Example ordering code
To obtain the complete ordering code, please combine code from the selection tables, as given in the example below.
The selected qty of each table must be filled in, if no selection is possible the code is 0
Example of a complete code: RED670*2.2 - F00X00 - A00000030211111100 - B52252552212521111111110000 - C33001321220200222210003001 - D22221011 -
T0000 - E66600 - F4 - S6 - G232 - H20401000000 - K22221111 - L1100 - M0010222 - P11100000000000000 - B1X0 - AC - CA - B - A3X0 -
CD1D1ARGN1N1XXXXXXX - KKKXXHKKLAGXSY
Product definition - Differential protection -

RED670* 2.2 - F00 X0 - A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
0
Impedance protection -
B 0 0 0 0 -
Current protection -
C 00 0 00 1 0 0 0 0 0 -
Voltage protection - Unbalance protection - Frequency protection - Multipurpose - General -

protection calculation
D 0 1 - T 0 0 0 0 - E 00 - F - S -
Secondary system supervision - Control -

G - H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
Scheme - Logic - Monitoring - Station communication -

communication
K - L 0 - M 1 0 - P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
0
Language - Casing and - Power - HMI - Analog - Binary input/output -

mounting supply system
B1 - - - - - -
Station communication, remote end serial communication and time synchronization

K
Table 214. Product definition
RED670* 2.2 F00 X00
Table 215. Product definition ordering codes
Product RED670*
Product version 2.2
Configuration alternative
Line differential protection RED670 F00
ACT configuration
No ACT configuration downloaded X00
Ordering number
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK002810-AG

Version 2.2
Table 216. Differential protection
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 217. Differential functions
Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and

identification qty qty rules
High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF 1MRK005904-HB 6 00-03
Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF 1MRK005904-LD 8 0-2
Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line ends L3CPDIF 1MRK005904-MC 9 0-1 1)
Line differential protection for 6 CT sets, 3-5 line ends L6CPDIF 1MRK005904-NC 10 0-1
Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line ends, inzone LT3CPDIF 1MRK005904-PC 11 0-1
transformer
Line differential protection for 6 CT sets, 3-5 line ends, inzone LT6CPDIF 1MRK005904-RC 12 0-1
transformer
High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3 line L4CPDIF 1MRK005905-NB 13 0-1
ends
Line differential protection logic LDLPSCH 1MRK005904-SA 14 0-1 2)
Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC 1MRK005904-TA 15 0-1
1) Only one PDIF must be ordered. L4CPDIF requires line data communication in 2Mbps mode.
2) Required with L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF or LT6CPDIF
Table 218. Impedance protection
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
B 0 0 0 0

Version 2.2
Table 219. Impedance functions, alternatives

Note: One and only one alternative can be selected. Selected qty is 0 for other functions in an unselected alternative.
Alternative 1 Distance protection, quadrilateral
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS, 1MRK005907-AA 1 0-7
ZMQAPDIS
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 1MRK005907-BA 2 0-2
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed FDPSPDIS 1MRK005907-CA 3 0-2
angle
Alternative 2 Distance protection for series compensated lines, quadrilateral
angle
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for ZMCPDIS, 1MRK005907-DA 4 0-5
series compensated lines ZMCAPDIS
Directional impedance quadrilateral, including series ZDSRDIR 1MRK005907-EA 5 0-2
compensation
Alternative 3 Distance protection, mho (mho for phase - phase fault and mho in parallel with quad for earth fault)
Full-scheme distance protection, mho characteristic ZMHPDIS 1MRK005907-FA 6 0-5
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth ZMMPDIS, 1MRK005907-GA 7 0-5
faults ZMMAPDIS
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR 1MRK005907-HA 8 0-2
Additional distance protection directional function for earth ZDARDIR 1MRK005907-KA 9 0-2
faults
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC 1MRK005907-LB 10 0-1
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS 1MRK005907-MA 11 0-2
Alternative 4 Distance protection, quadrilateral with separate settings for PP and PE
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 1MRK005907-BA 2 0-2
Distance measuring zone, quad characteristic separate Ph- ZMRPDIS, 1MRK005907-NA 12 0-5
Ph and Ph-E settings ZMRAPDIS
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable FRPSPDIS 1MRK005907-PA 13 0-2
angle
Alternative 5 High speed distance protection, quadrilateral and mho
High speed distance protection, quad and mho ZMFPDIS 1MRK005907-SF 14 0-1
characteristic
Alternative 6 High speed distance protection for series compensated lines, quadrilateral and mho
High speed distance protection for series compensated ZMFCPDIS 1MRK005907-RF 15 0-1
lines, quadrilateral and mho characteristic
Optional for alternative 1
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR 1MRK005907-HA 8 0-2
Optional for alternative 3
angle
Optional for alternatives 1, 2 and 4
Additional distance protection directional function for earth ZDARDIR 1MRK005907-KA 9 0-2
faults
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS 1MRK005907-MA 11 0-2
Optional for alternatives 1, 2, 3 and 4
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ 1MRK005908-DD 16 0-1
Optional for alternatives 5 and 6
Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ 1MRK005908-DE 17 0-1
Optional with any alternatives
Power swing detection, blocking and unblocking ZMBURPSB 1MRK005907-UB 18 0-1
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current ZCVPSOF 1MRK005908-AA 19 0-1
based
Power swing logic PSLPSCH 1MRK005907-VA 20 0-1
PoleSlip/Out-of-step protection PSPPPAM 1MRK005908-CB 21 0-1
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM 1MRK005908-GA 22 0-1

Version 2.2
Table 220. Current protection
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
C 00 0 00 1 0 0 0 0 0
Table 221. Current functions

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC 1MRK005910-AD 1 0-3
Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC 1MRK005910-BC 2 0-3
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC 1MRK005910-DD 4 0-1
Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC 1MRK005910-EF 5 0-3
Directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection, NS4PTOC 1MRK005910-FC 6 0-2
four steps
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power SDEPSDE 1MRK005910-GA 7 0-1
protection
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius LCPTTR 1MRK005911-BA 8 0-2
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Fahrenheit LFPTTR 1MRK005911-AA 9 0-2
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF 1MRK005910-LC 11 0-2
Stub protection STBPTOC 1MRK005910-NC 13 0-2
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 1MRK005910-PA 14 0-2
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 1MRK005910-RA 15 0-2
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 1MRK005910-TA 16 0-2
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC 1MRK005910-SA 17 1
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection VRPVOC 1MRK005910-XA 21 0-3
Average power transient earth fault protection APPTEF 1MRK006940-LA 24 0-1
Table 222. Voltage protection
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D 0 1
Table 223. Voltage functions

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 1MRK005912-AA 1 0-2
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 1MRK005912-BA 2 0-2
Residual overvoltage protection, two steps ROV2PTOV 1MRK005912-CE 3 0-2
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH 1MRK005912-DA 4 0-1
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV 1MRK005912-EB 5 0-2
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV 1MRK005912-GA 7 1
Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC 1MRK005912-HA 8 0-1
Table 224. Unbalance protection
Position 1 2 3 4
T 0 0 0 0
Table 225. Frequency protection
Position 1 2 3 4
E 00
Table 226. Frequency functions

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 1MRK005914-AC 1 0-6
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 1MRK005914-BB 2 0-6
Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC 1MRK005914-CB 3 0-6

Version 2.2
Table 227. Multipurpose protection
Position 1
F
Table 228. Multipurpose functions
Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules

identification qty qty
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 1MRK005915-AA 1 0-4
Table 229. General calculation
Position 1
S
Table 230. General calculation functions

Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC 1MRK005915-KB 1 0-6
Table 231. Secondary system supervision
Position 1 2 3
G
Table 232. Secondary system supervision functions

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC 1MRK005916-AC 1 0-2
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC 1MRK005916-BA 2 0-3
Fuse failure supervision based on voltage difference VDSPVC 1MRK005916-CA 3 0-2
Table 233. Control
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 234. Control functions

Synchrocheck, energizing check and synchronizing SESRSYN 1MRK005917-AC 1 0-2
Autorecloser SMBRREC 1MRK005917-BC 3 0-4
Control functionality for a single bay, max 10 objects (1CB), APC10 1MRK005917-DZ 5 0-1 1)
including interlocking
Control functionality for a single bay, max 15 objects (2CB), APC15 1MRK005917-EZ 6 0-1
including interlocking
1) Only one APC type can be ordered.
Table 235. Scheme communication
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K

Version 2.2
Table 236. Scheme communication functions

Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking ZCPSCH 1MRK005920-AA 1 0-2 1)
scheme signal transmit
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance ZC1PPSCH 1MRK005920-BA 2 0-2
protection
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance ZCRWPSCH 1MRK005920-CA 3 0-2 2)
protection
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase ZC1WPSCH 1MRK005920-DA 4 0-2
segregated communication
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH 1MRK005920-EA 5 0-1
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent ECPSCH 1MRK005920-FA 6 0-1
protection
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual ECRWPSCH 1MRK005920-GA 7 0-1
overcurrent protection
Direct transfer trip DTT 1MRK005921-AY 8 0-1
1) Only one of ZCPSCH/ZC1PPSCH can be selected.

2) Only one of ZCRWPSCH/ZC1WPSCH can be selected.
Table 237. Logic
Position 1 2 3
L 00
Table 238. Logic functions

Configurable logic blocks Q/T 1MRK005922-MX 1 0-1
Extension logic package 1MRK005922-DB 2 0-1
Table 239. Monitoring
Position 1 2 3 4
M 1 0
Table 240. Monitoring functions

Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR 1MRK005924-HA 1 00-06
Fault locator LMBRFLO 1MRK005925-XE 2 1
Through fault monitoring PTRSTHR 1MRK005924-TA 4 0–2
Current harmonic monitoring, 3 phase CHMMHAI 1MRK005924-QA 5 0–3
Voltage harmonic monitoring, 3 phase VHMMHAI 1MRK005924-SA 6 0–3
Table 241. Station communication
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 242. Station communication functions

IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus communication, 8 merging units 1MRK005933-HC 1 0-1
IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol PRP 1MRK005932-FA 2 0-1 1)
IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy HSR 1MRK005932-NA 3 0-1

Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors 1MRK005933-DA 15 0-1 2)
1) PRP and HSR require two SFPs placed in pairs.

2) This functionality requires accurate time synchronization, therefore either ‘Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Time synch or GTM or IRIG-B will be required.

Version 2.2
Table 243. Language selection
Language Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

First local HMI user dialogue language
HMI language, English IEC 1MRK002930-AA B1
Additional local HMI user dialogue language
No additional HMI language X0 1)
HMI language, English US 1MRK002920-UB A12

Selected B1
1) Additional 2nd languages are continuously being added. Please get in touch with local ABB sales contact.
Table 244. Casing selection
Casing Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

1/2 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VA A
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VB B
3/4 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VE C
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VC D
1/1 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VD E
Selected
Table 245. Mounting selection
Mounting details with IP40 of protection from the front Ordering no Selection Notes and rules
No mounting kit included X
19" rack mounting kit for 1/2 x 19" case or 2xRHGS6 or RHGS12 1MRK002420-BB A
19" rack mounting kit for 3/4 x 19" case or 3xRHGS6 1MRK002420-BA B
19" rack mounting kit for 1/1 x 19" case 1MRK002420-CA C
Wall mounting kit 1MRK002420-DA D 1)
Flush mounting kit 1MRK002420-PA E

Flush mounting kit + IP54 mounting seal 1MRK002420-NA F
Selected
1) Wall mounting not recommended with communication modules with fiber connection.
Table 246. Power supply module selection
Power supply module Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

Compression terminals 1MRK002960-GA C
Ringlug terminals 1MRK002960-HA R
Power supply module 24-60 VDC 1MRK002239-AB A
Power supply module 90-250 VDC 1MRK002239-BB B
Selected
Table 247. Human machine interface selection
Human machine hardware interface Case size Ordering no Selection Notes and rules
Medium size - graphic display, IEC keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", IEC 1MRK000028-AA B
3/4 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-BA
1/1 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-CA
Medium size - graphic display, ANSI keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", ANSI 1MRK000028-AB C
3/4 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-BB
1/1 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-CB
Selected

Version 2.2
Table 248. Analog system selection
Analog system Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

When more than one TRM is selected, the connector type on both TRMs must be the same (A compression or B ring lug).
Slot position (front view/rear view)
P40/X401
P41/X411
No Transformer input module included X0 X0 1)
TRM 12I 1A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-CG A1 A1

TRM 12I 5A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-CH A2 A2
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BG A3 A3
TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BH A4 A4
First TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-BK A5 A5
First TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AG A6 A6
First TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AH A7 A7
First TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-DG A8 A8 2)
First TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-DH A9 A9 3)
First TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AP A12 A12

First TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AR A13 A13
First TRM 6I 5A + 1I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AU A14 A14
First TRM 3I 5A + 4I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AV A15 A15
First TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AE A16 A16
First TRM 3IM 1A + 4IP 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-EA A17 A17
First TRM 3IM 5A + 4IP 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-EB A18 A18
TRM 12I 1A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-CC B1 B1
TRM 12I 5A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-CD B2 B2
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BC B3 B3
TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BD B4 B4
TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BF B5 B5
TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AC B6 B6
TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AD B7 B7
TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DC B8 B8 4)
TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DD B9 B9 5)
TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AS B12 B12

TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AT B13 B13
TRM 6I 5A + 1I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AX B14 B14
TRM 3I 5A + 4I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AY B15 B15
TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AF B16 B16
TRM 3IM 1A + 4IP 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-EC B17 B17
TRM 3IM 5A + 4IP 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-ED B18 B18
Selected
1) Only valid if IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus communication is selected.

2) Maximum qty = 1
3) Maximum qty = 1
4) Maximum qty = 1
5) Maximum qty = 1

Version 2.2
Table 249. Maximum quantity of I/O modules, with compression terminals
When ordering I/O modules, observe the maximum quantities according to the tables below.
Note: Standard order of location for I/O modules is BIM-BOM-SOM-IOM-MIM from left to right as seen from the rear side of the IED, but
can also be freely placed.
Note: The maximum quantity of I/O modules depends on the type of connection terminals.
Case sizes BIM IOM BOM/ MIM Maximum in case
SOM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 14 6 4 4 14 *)
one (1) TRM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 11 6 4 4 11 *)
two (2) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 8 6 4 4 8 *)
one (1) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 5 5 4 4 5 *)
two (2) TRM
1/2 x 19” rack casing, 3 3 3 1 3
one (1) TRM
*) including a combination of maximum four modules of type BOM, SOM and four modules of type MIM.
Table 250. Maximum quantity of I/O modules, with ringlug terminals
Note: Only every second slot can be used.

Case sizes BIM IOM BOM/ MIM Maximum in case
SOM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 7 6 4 4 7 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9, P11, P13, P15
one (1) TRM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 5 5 4 4 5 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9, P11
two (2) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 4 4 4 4 4 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9
one (1) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 2 2 2 2 2, possible locations: P3, P5
two (2) TRM
1/2 x 19” rack casing, 1 1 1 1 1, possible location: P3
one (1) TRM
**) including a combination of maximum four modules of type BOM, SOM and four modules of type MIM.

Version 2.2
Table 251. Binary input/output module selection
Binary input/ Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

output modules
Slot position
P3/X31
P4/X41
P5/X51
P6/X61
P7/X71
P8/X81
P9/X91
P10/X101
P11/X111
P12/X121
P13/X131
P14/X141
P15/X151
P16/X161
(front view/rear
view)
1/2 case with 1 █ █ █ 1)

TRM
3/4 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
TRM
3/4 case with 2 █ █ █ █ █
TRM
1/1 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
TRM
1/1 case with 2 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
TRM
Compression 1MRK002960-KA C
terminals
Ringlug 1MRK002960-LA R 2)
terminals
No board in slot X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Binary output 1MRK000614-AB A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
module 24
output relays
(BOM)
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-DD B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-AD C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-BD D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CD E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CE E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2
RL220,
220-250VDC,
120mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-HA F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-EA G G G G G G G G G G G G G G
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-FA H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-GA K K K K K K K K K K K K K K
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
IOM 8 inputs, RL 1MRK000173-GD L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1
24-30 VDC,
50mA, 10+2
output relays
IOM 8 inputs, RL 1MRK000173-AE M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1
48-60 VDC,
50mA, 10+2
output relays

Version 2.2
Table 251. Binary input/output module selection, continued

Binary input/ Ordering no Selection Notes and rules
output modules
IOM 8 inputs, RL 1MRK000173-BE N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1
110-125 VDC,
50mA, 10+2
output relays
IOM 8 inputs, RL 1MRK000173-CE P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
220-250 VDC,
50mA, 10+2
output relays
IOM 8 inputs, RL 1MRK000173-CF P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2
220-250 VDC,
110mA, 10+2
output relays
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-GC U U U U U U U U U U U U U U
inputs, RL 24-30
VDC, 50mA,
10+2 output
relays
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-AD V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
inputs, RL 48-60
VDC, 50mA,
10+2 output
relays
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-BD W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
inputs, RL
110-125 VDC,
50mA, 10+2
output relays
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-CD Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
inputs, RL
220-250 VDC,
50mA, 10+2
output relays
mA input 1MRK000284-AB R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
module MIM 6
channels
SOM static 1MRK002614-CA T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 3)
output module,
6 heavy duty
static outputs,
250 VDC + 6
output relays
Selected
1) These black marks indicate the maximum number of modules per casing type and the slots that can be occupied.
2) Only every second slot can be used; see Table 250
3) SOM must not be placed in in position nearest NUM: 1/2 case slot P5, 3/4 case 1 TRM slot P10, 3/4 case 2 TRM slot P7, 1/1 case 2 TRM slot P13, 1/1 case, 1 TRM slot P16.

Version 2.2
Table 252. Station communication, remote end serial communication and time synchronization selection
Station communication, remote end Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

serial communication and time
synchronization
Slot position (front view/rear 1)
P30:1/X301
P30:2/X302
P30:3/X303
P30:4/X304
P30:5/X305
P30:6/X306
P30:6:1/X3061
P30:6:2/X3062
P31:1/X311
P31:2/X312
P31:3/X313
P32:2/X322
P32:3/X323
LDCM mode
view)
Available slots in 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ 2)

case with 1 TRM
Available slots in 3/4 and 1/1 case █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
with 2 TRM
No communication board included X X X X X X X X X X X X
Ethernet SFP, optical LC connector 1MRK005500-AA K K K K K K 3)
Ethernet SFP, RJ45 connector 1MRK005500-BA P P P P P P

Optical Ethernet module 1MRK002266-EA H
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-AB L
60870-5-103 plastic interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-BB M
60870-5-103 plastic/glass
interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-CB N
60870-5-103 glass interface
Galvanic RS485 communication 1MRK002309-AA G G G 4)
module
Optical short range LDCM, 820 nm 1MRK002122-AB A A A A A A 5)
Optical medium range LDCM, 1310 1MRK002311-AA B B B B B B

nm
Optical long range LDCM, 1550 nm 1MRK002311-BA C C C C C C
Galvanic X21 line data 1MRK002307-AA E E E E
communication module
Line data communication, default — X
64kbps mode
Allow line data communication in 1MRK007002-AA Y
2Mbps mode
GPS time module 1MRK002282-AB S S S S
IRIG-B time synchronization 1MRK002305-AA F F F F
module, with PPS
Selected
1) The maximum number and type of LDCM modules supported depend on the total amount of I/O and communication modules in the IED.
2) Max 2 LDCM in 1/2 case
3) Ethernet SFP is basic in P30:1. P30:6:1 and P30:6:2 require the Optical Ethernet module in P30:6.
4) RS485 not allowed in slot X312
5) Max 4 LDCMs can be ordered. Always place LDCM modules on the same board to support redundant communication: in P30:5 and P30:6, P31:2 and P31:3 or P32:2 and P32:3.

Version 2.2
28. Ordering for pre-configured IED GUID-0B941090-4C75-45EE-A406-B7A938251673 v17
Guidelines
Carefully read and follow the set of rules to ensure problem-free order management.
Please refer to the available functions table for included application functions.
PCM600 can be used to make changes and/or additions to the delivered factory configuration of the pre-configured.
To obtain the complete ordering code, please combine code from the tables, as given in the example below.
Example code: RED670 *2.2-B33X00- A02H04-B1X0-AC-CA-B-A3X0-CDAB1RGN1N1XXXXXXX-KKKKXHKKLAGFSX. Using the code of each position #1-11
specified as RED670*1-2 2-3 3 3 3 3 3-4 4-5 6-7 7-8-9 9 9 9-10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10-11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
Product version Configuration Software options
alternatives
# 1 - 2 - 3 -
RED670* 2.2 - - -
Language Casing and Mounting Power supply HMI Analog system

4 - 5 6 - 7 - 8 - 9 -
- - - - -
Binary input/output modules Station communication, remote end serial communication and time
synchronization
10 - 11
-
Position
Product version #1 Notes and rules
Version no. 2.2
Selection for position #1 2.2
Configuration alternatives Ordering no #2 Notes and rules

Line differential protection, Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-5 line ends 1MRK004810-FG B33
Line differential protection, Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-3 line ends 1MRK004810-GG A42
Line differential protection, Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-3 line ends 1MRK004810-HG B42
Line differential protection, Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, with distance 1MRK004810-KG C42
protection
ACT configuration
ABB standard configuration X00
Selection for
position #2

Version 2.2
Software options Ordering no #3 Notes and rules

No option X00 1)
High impedance differential protection - 3 blocks 1MRK004001-AB A02

Line differential protection 6 CT sets 1MRK004001-AD A04 2), 3)
Line differential protection 6 CT sets + transformer 1MRK004001-AF A06

Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line ends 1MRK004001-AU A34
Sensitive line differential protection 4 CT sets 1MRK004001-AZ A35
Phase segregated scheme communication 1MRK004001-BE B05
High speed distance protection, quad and mho characteristic 1MRK004001-XA B35 4)
Out-of-step protection 1MRK004001-BW B22 5)
Pole slip protection 1MRK004001-VU B24 6)
Stub protection 1MRK004001-VK B27 7)
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection 1MRK004001-CT C16

Scheme communication for residual overcurrent protection 1MRK004001-VN C34 8)
Directional power and voltage restrained overcurrent protection 1MRK004001-VL C35

Average power transient earth fault protection 1MRK004001-UY C54
Overexcitation protection - 2 winding 1MRK004001-DC D03
Frequency protection - line 1MRK004001-ED E04 9)
General current and voltage protection 1MRK004001-FA F01

Fuse failure supervision based on voltage difference 1MRK004001-HC G03
Autorecloser, 1 circuit breaker 1MRK004001-GD H04 10)
Autorecloser, 2 circuit breakers 1MRK004001-GE H05 11)
Control functionality for up to 10 objects 1MRK004001-GW H37 12)
Control functionality for up to 15 objects 1MRK004001-GY H38

Through fault monitoring 1MRK004001-KR M22
Harmonic monitoring 1MRK004001-KS M23
IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol 1MRK004001-PP P23 13)
IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy 1MRK004001-PR P24

IEC 61850-9-2 Process Bus communication, 8 merging units 1MRK004001-PT P30
Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors 1MRK004001-PV P32 14)
Selection for
position #3
1) All fields in the ordering form do not need to be filled in.

2) Only one Line differential protection has to be selected.
3) A04, A06 and A34 only for B33
4) Only for B33/A42/B42
5) Only for B33/A42/ B42
6) Only for C42
7) Only for B33/B42; 1 block included as basic
8) Only for B33/A42/B42
9) 1 block already included
10) Only for A42/C42, 1 block already included
11) Only for B33/B42, 2 blocks already included
12) H37 only for A42/C42, H38 only for B33/B42
13) Options P23 and P24 require two SFPs placed in pairs.
14) This functionality requires accurate time synchronization, therefore either Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Time synch or GTM or IRIG-B will be required.
Language Ordering no #4 Notes and rules

First local HMI user dialogue language
HMI language, English IEC 1MRK002930-AA B1
Additional local HMI user dialogue language
No additional HMI language X0
HMI language, English US 1MRK002920-UB A12 1)
Selection for B1
position #4
1) Additional 2nd languages are continuously being added. Please get in touch with local ABB sales contact.

Version 2.2
Casing Ordering no #5 Notes and rules

1/2 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VA A
3/4 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VB B
3/4 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VE C
1/1 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VC D
1/1 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VD E
Selection for
position #5
Mounting details with IP40 of protection from the front Ordering no #6 Notes and rules
No mounting kit included X
19" rack mounting kit for 1/2 x 19" case or 2xRHGS6 or RHGS12 1MRK002420-BB A
19" rack mounting kit for 3/4 x 19" case or 3xRHGS6 1MRK002420-BA B
19" rack mounting kit for 1/1 x 19" case 1MRK002420-CA C
Wall mounting kit 1MRK002420-DA D 1)
Flush mounting kit 1MRK002420-PA E

Flush mounting kit + IP54 mounting seal 1MRK002420-NA F
Selection for
position #6
1) Wall mounting not recommended with communication modules with fiber connection.
Power supply modules Ordering no #7 Notes and rules

Compression terminals 1MRK002960-GA C
Ringlug terminals 1MRK002960-HA R
Power supply module, 24-60 VDC 1MRK002239-AB A
Power supply module, 90-250 VDC 1MRK002239-BB B
Selection for
position #7
Human machine hardware interface Case size Ordering no #8 Notes and rules
Medium size - graphic display, IEC keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", IEC 1MRK000028-AA B
3/4 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-BA
1/1 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-CA
Medium size - graphic display, ANSI keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", ANSI 1MRK000028-AB C
3/4 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-BB
1/1 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-CB
Selection for
position #8

Version 2.2
Analog system Ordering no #9 Notes and rules

When more than one TRM is selected, the connector type on both TRMs must be the same (A compression or B ring lug).
Slot position (front view/rear view)
P40/X401
P41/X411
No Transformer input module included X0 X0 1)
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BG A3

TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BH A4
TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BK A5
TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AG A6 A6 2)
TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AH A7 A7

TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-DG A8
TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-DH A9
TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AP A12
TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AR A13
TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AE A16 A16 3)
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BC B3

TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BD B4
TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BF B5
TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AC B6 B6 4)
TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AD B7 B7

TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DC B8
TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DD B9
TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AS B12
TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AT B13
TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AF B16 B16 5)
Selection for
position #9
1) Only valid if IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus communication is selected.

2) Second TRM is optional.
3) Only for A42/C42. Second TRM is optional.
4) Second TRM is optional.
5) Only for A42/C42. Second TRM is optional.

Version 2.2
Binary input/ Ordering no #10 Notes and rules

output modules
For pulse counting, for example kWh metering, the BIM with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be used.
Note: 1 BIM required in position P3 and 1 BOM required in position P4.
Slot position
P3/X31
P4/X41
P5/X51
P6/X61
P7/X71
P8/X81
P9/X91
P10/X101
P11/X111
P12/X121
P13/X131
P14/X141
P15/X151
P16/X161
(front view/rear
view)
1/2 case with 1 █ █ █ 1)

TRM
3/4 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
TRM
3/4 case with 2 █ █ █ █ █
TRM
1/1 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
TRM
1/1 case with 2 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
TRM
Compression 1MRK002960-KA C
terminals
No board in slot X X X X X X X X X X X X
Binary output 1MRK000614-AB A A A A A A A A A A A A A 2)
module 24
output relays
(BOM)
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-DD B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
RL24, 24-30VDC,
5mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-AD C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-BD D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CD E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CE E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2
RL220,
220-250VDC,
120mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-HA F F F F F F F F F F F F
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-EA G G G G G G G G G G G G
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-FA H H H H H H H H H H H H
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-GA K K K K K K K K K K K K
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
IOM 8 inputs, RL 1MRK000173-GD L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1
24-30 VDC,
50mA, 10+2
output relays
IOM 8 inputs, RL 1MRK000173-AE M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1
48-60 VDC,
50mA, 10+2
output relays
IOM 8 inputs, RL 1MRK000173-BE N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1
110-125 VDC,
50mA, 10+2
output relays

Version 2.2
Binary input/ Ordering no #10 Notes and rules

output modules
For pulse counting, for example kWh metering, the BIM with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be used.
Note: 1 BIM required in position P3 and 1 BOM required in position P4.
IOM 8 inputs, RL 1MRK000173-CE P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
220-250 VDC,
50mA, 10+2
output relays
IOM 8 inputs, RL 1MRK000173-CF P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2
220-250 VDC,
110mA, 10+2
output relays
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-GC U U U U U U U U U U U U
inputs, RL 24-30
VDC, 50mA,
10+2 output
relays
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-AD V V V V V V V V V V V V
inputs, RL 48-60
VDC, 50mA,
10+2 output
relays
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-BD W W W W W W W W W W W W
inputs, RL
110-125 VDC,
50mA, 10+2
output relays
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-CD Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
inputs, RL
220-250 VDC,
50mA, 10+2
output relays
mA input 1MRK000284-AB R R R R R R R R R R R R 3)
module MIM 6
channels
SOM static 1MRK002614-CA T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 4)
output module,
6 heavy duty
static outputs,
250 VDC + 6
output relays
Selection for C
position #10
1) These black marks indicate the maximum number of modules per casing type and the slots that can be occupied.
2) Maximum 4 (BOM+SOM+MIM) boards.
3) maximum 1 MIM board in 1/2 case
4) SOM must not to be placed in position nearest to NUM: 1/2 case slot P5, 3/4 case 1 TRM slot P10, 3/4 case 2 TRM slot P7, 1/1 case 2 TRM slot P13, 1/1 case, 1 TRM slot P16.

Version 2.2
Station communication, remote end serial Ordering no #11 Notes and rules
communication and time synchronization
Slot position (front view/rear view) 1)
P30:1/X301
P30:2/X302
P30:3/X303
P30:4/X304
P30:5/X305
P30:6/X306
P30:6:1/X3061
P30:6:2/X3062
P31:1/X311
P31:2/X312
P31:3/X313
P32:2/X322
P32:3/X323
LDCM mode
Available slots in 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ 2)
TRM
Available slots in 3/4 and 1/1 case with 2 TRM █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
No communication board included X X X X X X X X X X X
Ethernet SFP, optical LC connector 1MRK005500-AA K K K K K K 3)
Ethernet SFP, RJ45 connector 1MRK005500-BA P P P P P P

Optical Ethernet module 1MRK002266-EA H 4)
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 60870-5-103 plastic 1MRK001608-AB L

interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 60870-5-103 plastic/ 1MRK001608-BB M
glass interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 60870-5-103 glass 1MRK001608-CB N
interface
Galvanic RS485 communication module 1MRK002309-AA G G G
Optical short range, LDCM 820 nm 1MRK002122-AB A A A A A A 5), 6), 7), 8)
Optical medium range, LDCM 1310 nm 1MRK002311-AA B B B B B B

Optical long range, LDCM 1550 nm C C C C C C
Line data communication, default 64kbps — X 9)
mode
Allow line data communication in 2Mbps mode 1MRK007002-AA Y
GPS time module 1MRK002282-AB S S S S
IRIG-B time synchronization module, with PPS 1MRK002305-AA F F F F
Selection for
position #11
1) The maximum number and type of LDCM modules supported depend on the total amount of I/O and communication modules in the IED.
2) Max 2 LDCM in 1/2 case
3) Ethernet SFP is basic in P30:1. P30:6:1 and P30:6:2 require the Optical Ethernet module in P30:6.
4) When OEM is ordered in combination with 2 or 4 LDCMs in redundant mode, it is required to order RED as a customized product.
5) For RED670 A42, B42 and C42, one LDCM is required in P30:5.
6) For RED670 B33, two LDCMs are required in P30:5 and P31:2.
7) For RED670-B33, LT3CPDIF included as Basic. One of the following (LT6CPDIF/L6CPDIF/L3CPDIF) as optional.
8) Max 4 LDCMs can be ordered. Always place LDCM modules on the same board to support redundant communication: P30:5, P30:6, P31:2, P31:3 or P32:2 and P32:3.
9) For A42/B42/C42, only 2Mbps is allowed. For B33, select either 64kbps or 2Mbps; default is 64kbps.

Version 2.2
29. Ordering for Accessories
Accessories IP15151-1 v1
GPS antenna and mounting details
M12374-3 v5
GPS antenna, including mounting kits Quantity: 1MRK 001 640-AA
Cable for antenna, 20 m (Appx. 65 ft) Quantity: 1MRK 001 665-AA
Cable for antenna, 40 m (Appx. 131 ft) Quantity: 1MRK 001 665-BA
Interface converter (for remote end data communication)

M16668-3 v10
1 2 3 4
External interface converter from C37.94 (64kbps) to G703 Quantity : 1MRK 002 245-AA
1 2 3 4
External interface converter from C37.94 (64kbps/2Mbps) to G703.E1 Quantity : 1MRK 002 245-BA
Test switch Multi-breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with internal

SEMOD111888-5 v13
The test system COMBITEST intended for use with the neutral on current circuits (ordering number RK926 315-
IEDs is described in 1MRK 512 001-BEN and 1MRK BE).
001024-CA. Please refer to the website:
www.abb.com/protection-control for detailed Multi-breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with external
information. neutral on current circuit (ordering number RK926 315-
BV).
Due to the high flexibility of our product and the wide
variety of applications possible the test switches needs The normally open "In test mode" contact 29-30 on the
to be selected for each specific application. RTXP test switches should be connected to the input of
the test function block to allow activation of functions
Select your suitable test switch base on the available individually during testing.
contacts arrangements shown in the reference
documentation. Test switches type RTXP 24 is ordered separately. Please
refer to Section Related documents for references to
However our proposals for suitable variants are; corresponding documents.
Single breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with internal RHGS 6 Case or RHGS 12 Case with mounted RTXP 24
neutral on current circuits (ordering number RK926 315- and the on/off switch for DC-supply are ordered
AK). separately. Please refer to Section Related documents
for references to corresponding documents.
Single breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with external
neutral on current circuits (ordering number RK926 315-
AC).

Version 2.2
Protection cover
M15040-3 v8
Protective cover for rear side of RHGS6, 6U, 1/4 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-AE
Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 1/2 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-AC
Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 3/4 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-AB
Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 1/1 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-AA
External resistor unit

SEMOD120228-4 v9
High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor 20-100V, Quantity : 1 2 3 RK 795 101-MA
1ph
High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor 20-100V, Quantity : RK 795 101-MB
3ph
High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor Quantity : 1 2 3 RK 795 101-CB
100-400V, 1ph
High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor Quantity : RK 795 101-DC
100-400V, 3ph
Combiflex
IP15161-1 v1
Key switch for settings SEMOD130356-4 v7
Key switch for lock-out of settings via LHMI Quantity: 1MRK 000 611-A
Note: To connect the key switch, leads with 10 A Combiflex socket on one end must be used.
SEMOD130267-5 v8
Mounting kit
Side-by-side mounting kit Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-Z
Configuration and monitoring tools

M15042-3 v5 IP15162-1 v2
Front connection cable between LHMI and PC Quantity: 1MRK 001 665-CA
SEMOD131414-4 v4
LED Label special paper A4, 1 pc Quantity: 1MRK 002 038-CA
LED Label special paper Letter, 1 pc Quantity: 1MRK 002 038-DA
Manuals M15161-3 v16
Note: One (1) IED Connect USB flash drive containing user documentation (Operation manual,
Technical manual, Installation manual, Commissioning manual, Application manual and Getting
started guide), Connectivity packages and LED label template is always included for each IED.

Version 2.2
Specify additional quantity of IED Connect USB flash drive requested. Quantity: 1MRK 002 290-AE

Version 2.2
User documentation
Specify the number of printed manuals requested
Application manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 505 376-UEN
ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 505 376-UUS
Technical manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 505 377-UEN
Commissioning manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 505 378-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1 IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 392-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2 IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 393-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103 IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 394-UEN
Communication protocol manual, LON IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 395-UEN
Communication protocol manual, SPA IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 396-UEN
Communication protocol manual, DNP ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 511 391-UUS
Point list manual, DNP ANSI Quantity 1MRK 511 397-UUS
Operation manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 500 127-UEN
Installation manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 514 026-UEN
Engineering manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 398-UEN

Version 2.2
Cyber security deployment guideline IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 399-UEN
Application guide, Communication set-up IEC Quantity: 1MRK 505 382-UEN
Reference information M2175-3 v4
For our reference and statistics we would be pleased to be provided with the following application data:
Country: End user:
Station name: Voltage level: kV
Related documents GUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v8 670 series manuals Document numbers
Documents related to RED670 Document numbers Operation manual IEC: 1MRK 500 127-UEN
ANSI: 1MRK 500 127-UUS
Application manual IEC: 1MRK 505 376-UEN
ANSI: 1MRK 505 376-UUS Engineering manual IEC: 1MRK 511 398-UEN
Commissioning manual IEC: 1MRK 505 378-UEN
ANSI: 1MRK 505 378-UUS Installation manual IEC: 1MRK 514 026-UEN
Product guide 1MRK 505 379-BEN
Communication protocol 1MRK 511 391-UUS
Technical manual IEC: 1MRK 505 377-UEN manual, DNP3
Communication protocol 1MRK 511 394-UEN
Type test certificate IEC: 1MRK 505 379-TEN manual, IEC 60870-5-103
ANSI: 1MRK 505 379-TUS
manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1

manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2

manual, LON

manual, SPA
Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 397-UUS
Accessories guide IEC: 1MRK 514 012-BEN

ANSI: 1MRK 514 012-BUS
Cyber security deployment 1MRK 511 399-UEN

guideline
Connection and Installation 1MRK 513 003-BEN

components
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN
Application guide, 1MRK 505 382-UEN

Communication set-up

183
ABB Power Grids Sweden AB
Grid Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 10 738 00 00
Scan this QR code to visit our website
https://www.abb.com/protection-control
1MRK 505 379-BEN
© Copyright 2017 Hitachi Power Grids.

All rights reserved.

Red 670 2.2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Red 670 2.2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Relion® 670 SERIES

Line differential protection RED670

1. Document revision history.................................................3 16. Monitoring......................................................................... 50

1. Document revision history GUID-34B323E4-1319-4D42-80CE-29B0F2D36E2C v4

Table 1. Document revision history

Document Date Product revision History

A 2017-07 2.2.0 First release for product version 2.2

B 2017-10 2.2.1 Ethernet ports with RJ45 connector added. enhancements/updates

C 2018-04 2.2.1 Document enhancements and corrections

D Document not released

G Document not released

H 2018-12 2.2.3 Functions CHMMHAI, VHMMHAI, DELVSPVC, DELISPVC and DELSPVC,

J 2019-05 2.2.3 PTP enhancements and corrections

K Document not released

L Document not released

M Document not released

Hitachi Power Grids 3

Disturbance recording and fault locator are available to

Hitachi Power Grids 5

Description of configuration A42 GUID-A3E1E81D-9278-4AC1-8AAA-AD0D56DABE23 v2

RED670 A42 – Single breaker with single or three phase tripping

63 71 94 1→0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC

REM_VT 87L 3Id/I> 11REL

MET Usqi MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I<

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh MET I MET Isqi

27 2(3U<) 27 3U< 59 2(3U>) MET UN MET U

Other Functions available from the function library

Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

67NT IO> → TEF ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id>

24 U/f> 78 Ucos Zpsl 78 Ucos 51TF 3 Control 3 Control

3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> VTHD UTHD 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85

Figure 1. Block diagram for configuration A42

6 Hitachi Power Grids

Description of configuration B33 GUID-1231CFD6-8CEF-464E-8124-E9F7EFD0FF62 v2

RED670 B33 – Multi breaker with single or three phase tripping

LINE1_QB9 87L 87L 3Id/I>

MET Usqi MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I<

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh

LINE2_VT V MMXU VN MMXU UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV OV2 PTOV

Other Functions available from the function library

WA2_QB6 26 Θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 3 Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f>

81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

67NT IO> → TEF ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P>

37 P< 87 Id> 87L 3Id/I> 87L 3Id/I> 87L 3Id/I> 24 U/f>

3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<)

S CILO S CSWI SDE PSDE S XSWI VD SPVC VR PVOC

Figure 2. Block diagram for configuration B33

Hitachi Power Grids 7

Description of configuration B42 GUID-D1058782-6EAD-4E94-8513-1D3647E67250 v2

RED670 B42 – Multi breaker with single or three phase tripping

LINE1_QB9 87L 3Id/I>

MET Usqi MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I<

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh

LINE2_VT V MMXU VN MMXU UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV OV2 PTOV

Other Functions available from the function library

WA2_QB6 26 Θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 3 Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f>

81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

67NT IO> → TEF ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P>

QB2 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos Zpsl

3 Control 60 Ud> VTHD UTHD 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85

Figure 3. Block diagram for configuration B42

8 Hitachi Power Grids

Description of configuration C42 GUID-C82DE474-FDC4-49CF-AF12-445716D9C6B6 v2